100% found this document useful (2 votes)

3K views478 pages

2002 Nissan Pathfinder

2002 nissan pathfinder

Uploaded by

lincesur24012727

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

100% found this document useful (2 votes)

3K views478 pages

2002 Nissan Pathfinder

2002 nissan pathfinder

Uploaded by

lincesur24012727

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 478

GI

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
MA

SECTION EL EM

CONTENTS CL

PRECAUTIONS ...............................................................4 Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................55

MT
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ″AIR Bulb Replacement .....................................................60
BAG″ and ″SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER″...............4 Aiming Adjustment .....................................................60
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis.....................4 PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS .....................61 AT
HARNESS CONNECTOR................................................5 System Description....................................................61
Description ...................................................................5 Schematic ..................................................................63
STANDARDIZED RELAY................................................7 Wiring Diagram - TAIL/L -..........................................64 TF
Description ...................................................................7 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure............................68
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING...........................................9 CONSULT-II Application Items ..................................69
Schematic ....................................................................9 Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................69
PD
Wiring Diagram - POWER - ......................................10 STOP LAMP ..................................................................71
Inspection...................................................................16 Wiring Diagram - STOP/L - .......................................71 AX
GROUND........................................................................17 BACK-UP LAMP............................................................73
Ground Distribution....................................................17 Wiring Diagram - BACK/L - .......................................73
COMBINATION SWITCH ..............................................28 FRONT FOG LAMP.......................................................74 SU
Check.........................................................................28 System Description....................................................74
Replacement..............................................................29 Wiring Diagram - F/FOG - .........................................75
STEERING SWITCH......................................................30 Aiming Adjustment .....................................................77 BR
Check.........................................................................30 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS .....78
HEADLAMP (FOR USA) ...............................................31 System Description....................................................78 ST
Component Parts and Harness Connector Wiring Diagram - TURN - ..........................................80
Location .....................................................................31 Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................82
System Description....................................................31 Electrical Components Inspection .............................82 RS
Schematic ..................................................................34 ILLUMINATION..............................................................83
Wiring Diagram - H/LAMP -.......................................35 System Description....................................................83
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure............................39 Schematic ..................................................................85 BT
CONSULT-II Application Items ..................................40 Wiring Diagram - ILL - ...............................................86
Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................40 INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND
Bulb Replacement .....................................................43 LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS ...........................................92
HA
Aiming Adjustment .....................................................43 System Description....................................................92
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) - DAYTIME LIGHT Schematic ..................................................................94 SC
SYSTEM - ......................................................................45 Wiring Diagram - INT/L - ...........................................95
Component Parts and Harness Connector CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................100
Location .....................................................................45 CONSULT-II Application Items ................................101
System Description....................................................45 Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer.............103
Schematic ..................................................................49 METERS AND GAUGES.............................................118
Wiring Diagram - DTRL -...........................................50 Component Parts and Harness Connector
IDX
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure............................55 Location ...................................................................118
CONSULT-II Application Items ..................................55 System Description..................................................118
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
Combination Meter ..................................................120 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................180
Schematic ................................................................122 Electrical Components Inspection ...........................183
Wiring Diagram - METER - .....................................123 Filament Check........................................................183
Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter Filament Repair .......................................................184
Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode ........................124 AUDIO ..........................................................................186
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................125 System Description..................................................186
Electrical Components Inspection ...........................131 Wiring Diagram - AUDIO -/Base System ................187
COMPASS AND THERMOMETER .............................132 Schematic/BOSE System ........................................189
System Description..................................................132 Wiring Diagram - AUDIO -/BOSE System...............190
Wiring Diagram - COMPAS -...................................133 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................195
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................134 Inspection.................................................................196
Calibration Procedure for Compass ........................135 Audio Unit Removal and Installation .......................196
WARNING LAMPS ......................................................136 Wiring Diagram - REMOTE -...................................197
Schematic ................................................................136 AUDIO ANTENNA .......................................................198
Wiring Diagram - WARN - .......................................137 System Description..................................................198
Fuel Warning Lamp Sensor Check .........................145 Wiring Diagram - P/ANT - .......................................199
Electrical Components Inspection ...........................145 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................200
WARNING CHIME .......................................................146 Location of Antenna.................................................200
Component Parts and Harness Connector Antenna Rod Replacement .....................................200
Location ...................................................................146 POWER SUNROOF.....................................................202
System Description..................................................146 System Description..................................................202
Wiring Diagram - CHIME - ......................................148 Wiring Diagram - SROOF - .....................................203
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................150 CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................205
CONSULT-II Application Items ................................151 CONSULT-II Application Items ................................206
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................152 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................206
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER ..................................160 DOOR MIRROR ...........................................................208
System Description..................................................160 Wiring Diagram - MIRROR - ...................................208
Wiring Diagram - WIPER - ......................................162 POWER SEAT .............................................................209
Removal and Installation .........................................163 Wiring Diagram - SEAT - .........................................209
Washer Nozzle Adjustment .....................................164 HEATED SEAT ............................................................211
Washer Tube Layout ...............................................164 Wiring Diagram - HSEAT - ......................................211
REAR WIPER AND WASHER ....................................165 Seatback Heating Unit.............................................212
System Description..................................................165 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER ............................213
Wiring Diagram - WIP/R -........................................167 Component Parts and Harness Connector
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................169 Location ...................................................................213
Removal and Installation .........................................169 System Description..................................................214
Washer Nozzle Adjustment .....................................170 Schematic ................................................................217
Washer Tube Layout ...............................................170 Wiring Diagram - AUT/DP - .....................................218
Check Valve.............................................................170 On Board Diagnosis ................................................223
HORN ...........................................................................171 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................225
Wiring Diagram - HORN - .......................................171 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) ...248
CIGARETTE LIGHTER................................................172 Component Parts and Harness Connector
Wiring Diagram - CIGAR -.......................................172 Location ...................................................................248
CLOCK.........................................................................173 System Description..................................................249
Wiring Diagram - CLOCK -......................................173 Schematic ................................................................251
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER.....................................174 Wiring Diagram - ASCD - ........................................252
Component Parts and Harness Connector Fail-safe System ......................................................256
Location ...................................................................174 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................257
System Description..................................................174 Electrical Component Inspection .............................266
Wiring Diagram - DEF -...........................................176 ASCD Wire Adjustment ...........................................267
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................178 POWER WINDOW .......................................................268
CONSULT-II Application Items ................................179 System Description..................................................268

EL-2
CONTENTS (Cont’d) GI
Schematic ................................................................271 Component Parts and Harness Connetor
Wiring Diagram - WINDOW - ..................................272 Location ...................................................................385 MA
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................277 System Description..................................................386
CONSULT-II Application Items ................................278 System Composition................................................386
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................278 Wiring Diagram - NATS -.........................................387 EM
POWER DOOR LOCK.................................................287 CONSULT-II .............................................................388
Component Parts and Harness Connector Trouble Diagnoses...................................................391
Location ...................................................................287 How to Replace NVIS (NATS) IMMU......................404
LC
System Description..................................................287 NAVIGATION SYSTEM ...............................................405
Schematic ................................................................288 Component Parts Location ......................................405 EC
Wiring Diagram - D/LOCK -.....................................289 System Description..................................................406
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................295 Schematic ................................................................413
CONSULT-II Application Items ................................296 Wiring Diagram - NAVI -..........................................414 FE
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................297 Self-diagnosis Mode ................................................417
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM.......................310 Confirmation/Adjustment Mode ...............................420
Component Parts and Harness Connector Setting Mode............................................................430
CL
Location ...................................................................310 Trouble diagnoses ...................................................438
System Description..................................................310 This Condition is Not Abnormal...............................444 MT
Schematic ................................................................314 Program Loading .....................................................453
Wiring Diagram - KEYLESS -..................................315 Initialization ..............................................................454
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................319 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION...............................457 AT
CONSULT-II Application Items ................................320 Engine Compartment...............................................457
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................321 Passenger Compartment.........................................458
ID Code Entry Procedure ........................................334 HARNESS LAYOUT ....................................................460 TF
Keyfob Battery Replacement...................................338 How to Read Harness Layout .................................460
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) Outline......................................................................461
PD
SYSTEM.......................................................................339 Main Harness...........................................................462
Component Parts and Harness Connector Engine Room Harness ............................................464
Location ...................................................................339 Engine Control Harness ..........................................466 AX
System Description..................................................340 Body Harness LH ....................................................468
Schematic ................................................................344 Body Harness RH....................................................469
Wiring Diagram - VEHSEC - ...................................346 Back Door Harness .................................................470 SU
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure..........................352 Engine and Transmission Harness..........................471
CONSULT-II Application Item ..................................353 Room Lamp Harness...............................................472
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................354 Air Bag Harness ......................................................473
BR
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT .......................372 Front Door Harness .................................................474
Description ...............................................................372 Rear Door Harness..................................................475 ST
CONSULT-II .............................................................374 BULB SPECIFICATIONS ............................................476
Schematic ................................................................376 Headlamp.................................................................476
Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table ........378 Exterior Lamp ..........................................................476 RS
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER..................381 Interior Lamp............................................................476
Wiring Diagram - TRNSCV - ...................................381 WIRING DIAGRAM CODES (CELL CODES).............477
Trouble Diagnoses...................................................382 BT
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
- NATS) ........................................................................385 HA

IDX

EL-3
PRECAUTIONS
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR

BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” NAEL0001
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL R50 is as follows:
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steer-
ing wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of side air bag module (located in the outer side of front seat),
satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring harness,
warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the RS section.
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow harness connector (and by yel-
low harness protector or yellow insulation tape before the harness connectors).
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis NAEL0002
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
I GI-11, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”
I EL-9, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
I GI-35, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES”
I GI-24, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”
Check for any Service bulletins before servicing the vehicle.

EL-4
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description

Description NAEL0003
GI
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) NAEL0003S01
I The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
MA
I The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the
illustration below.
Refer to the next page for description of the slide-locking type connector. EM
CAUTION:
Do not pull the harness when disconnecting the connector.
LC
[Example]

SC
SEL769D

IDX

EL-5
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description (Cont’d)
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) =NAEL0003S02
I A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those
related to OBD.
I The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnec-
tion.
I The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the illustra-
tion below.
CAUTION:
I Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
I Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]

SEL769V

EL-6
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description

Description NAEL0004
GI
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS NAEL0004S01
Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
MA

SEL881H
AT
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS NAEL0004S02
TF
1M 1 Make 2M 2 Make

1T 1 Transfer 1M·1B 1 Make 1 Break

SEL882H HA

IDX

EL-7
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description (Cont’d)

GEL264

EL-8
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Schematic

Schematic NAEL0247
GI

MEL400O
IDX

EL-9
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Wiring Diagram — POWER —

Wiring Diagram — POWER — NAEL0248

BATTERY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION NAEL0248S01

MEL401O

EL-10
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Wiring Diagram — POWER — (Cont’d)

MEL402O

IDX

EL-11
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Wiring Diagram — POWER — (Cont’d)

MEL551P

EL-12
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Wiring Diagram — POWER — (Cont’d)
ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ACC” OR “ON” NAEL0248S02
GI

MEL403O
IDX

EL-13
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Wiring Diagram — POWER — (Cont’d)
IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ON” AND/OR “START” NAEL0248S03

MEL404O

EL-14
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Wiring Diagram — POWER — (Cont’d)

MEL552P

IDX

EL-15
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING
Inspection

Inspection NAEL0249
FUSE NAEL0249S01
I If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem
before installing new fuse.
I Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than
specified rating.
I Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse
holder properly.
I Remove fuse for “ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)” if vehicle is
not used for a long period of time.
CEL083

FUSIBLE LINK NAEL0249S02

A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or
by feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit
tester or test lamp.
CAUTION:
I If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit
(power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted.
In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of
problem.
I Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Impor-
MEL944F tant: Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness,
vinyl or rubber parts.

CIRCUIT BREAKER (PTC THERMISTOR TYPE) NAEL0249S03

The PTC thermister generates heat in response to current flow.
The temperature (and resistance) of the thermister element varies
with current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element’s
temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified
level, the electrical resistance will rise sharply to control the circuit
current.
Reduced current flow will cause the element to cool. Resistance
falls accordingly and normal circuit current flow is allowed to
resume.
SEL109W

EL-16
GROUND
Ground Distribution

Ground Distribution NAEL0250

GI
MAIN HARNESS NAEL0250S01

MEL489P
IDX

EL-17
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)

MEL490P

EL-18
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)

MEL478O

IDX

EL-19
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS NAEL0250S02

MEL415O

EL-20
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)

MEL908N

IDX

EL-21
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS NAEL0250S03

MEL704O

EL-22
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)

CL
MEL233M

IDX

EL-23
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
BODY HARNESS RH NAEL0250S04

MEL909N

EL-24
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
BODY HARNESS LH NAEL0250S05
GI

MEL416O
IDX

EL-25
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)

MEL911N

EL-26
GROUND
Ground Distribution (Cont’d)
BODY HARNESS NAEL0250S06
GI

MEL152M
EC

IDX

EL-27
COMBINATION SWITCH
Check

Check NAEL0251

MEL911O

EL-28
COMBINATION SWITCH
Replacement

Replacement NAEL0252
GI
For removal and installation of spiral cable, refer to RS-18,
“Installation — Air Bag Module and Spiral Cable”.
I Each switch can be replaced without removing combination MA
switch base.
EM

LC
MEL912O

I To remove combination switch base, remove base attaching EC

screw.
FE

MT
MEL326G
AT
I Before installing the steering wheel, align the steering wheel
guide pins with the screws which secure the combination
switch as shown in the left figure. TF

SEL151V SU

IDX

EL-29
STEERING SWITCH
Check

Check NAEL0253

MEL447P

EL-30
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location

Component Parts and Harness Connector GI

Location NAEL0254

PD
SEL288Y

System Description AX
NAEL0255
The headlamp operation is controlled by the lighting switch which is built into the combination switch and smart
entrance control unit. And the headlamp battery saver system is controlled by the smart entrance control unit.
SU
OUTLINE NAEL0255S01
Power is supplied at all times
I to headlamp LH relay terminals 1 and 3
BR
I through 15A fuse (No. 60, located in the fuse and fusible link box), and
I to headlamp RH relay terminals 1 and 3 ST
I through 15A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and fusible link box), and
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 49
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. RS
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 27 BT
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
HA
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 26
I through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
Ground is supplied SC
I to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64
I through body grounds M77 and M111.
POWER SUPPLY TO LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM NAEL0255S02
When lighting switch is in 2ND or PASS position, ground is supplied
I to headlamp relay (LH and RH) terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59
IDX

EL-31
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
System Description (Cont’d)
I through smart entrance control unit terminals 22 and 60,
I from lighting switch terminal 12
Headlamp relays (LH and RH) are energized and then power is supplied to headlamps (LH and RH).
LOW BEAM OPERATION NAEL0255S03
When the lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position and placed in LOW (“B”) position, power is supplied
I from terminal 5 of each headlamp relay
I to terminal 3 of each headlamp
Ground is supplied
I to headlamp LH terminal 2
I through lighting switch terminals 7 and 5
I through body grounds E13 and E41, and
I to headlamp RH terminal 2
I through lighting switch terminal 10 and 8
I through body grounds E13 and E41.
With power and ground supplied, the headlamp(s) will illuminate.
HIGH BEAM OPERATION/FLASH-TO-PASS OPERATION NAEL0255S04
When the lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position and placed in HIGH (“A”) position or PASS (“C”) position,
power is supplied
I from terminal 5 of each headlamp relay
I to terminal 3 of each headlamp, and
I to combination meter terminal 26 for the HIGH BEAM indicator.
Ground is supplied
I to headlamp LH terminal 1, and
I to combination meter terminal 27 for the HIGH BEAM indicator
I through lighting switch terminals 6 and 5
I through body grounds E13 and E41, and
I to headlamp RH terminal 1
I through lighting switch terminals 9 and 8
I through body grounds E13 and E41.
With power and ground supplied, the high beams and the high beam indicator illuminate.
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL NAEL0255S05
Except for Auto Light Control Operation NAEL0255S0501
Headlamps will remain on for a short while after the ignition switch is turned from ON (or ACC) to OFF.
Continuity between terminals 21 and 22, and between terminals 59 and 60 of smart entrance control unit will
be disturbed after 5 minutes, then the headlamps will be turned off.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after headlamps are turned to off by the exterior lamp
battery saver control, ground is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and then,
I to headlamp LH and RH relays terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59,
I through smart entrance control unit terminals 22 and 60 and
I through lighting switch terminal 12.
Then headlamps illuminate again.
Auto light control operation NAEL0255S0502
While the headlamps are turned ON by “AUTO” operation, the exterior lamp battery saver is activated for 5
minutes when the ignition switch is turned from ON (or ACC) to OFF, and either LH or RH front door switch
is opened.
The smart entrance control unit controls exterior lamp battery saver activation as follows:
I When the door switch signal changes from ON to OFF while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated,
the operation is discontinued, and restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the headlamps will be turned
off.
I When the door switch signal changes from OFF to ON while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated,
the operation discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the headlamps will be turned off.
EL-32
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
System Description (Cont’d)
I When the one of four door switch signals changes from OFF to ON while the exterior lamp battery saver GI
is activated, the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 5 minutes, then the headlamps will be
turned off.
I When all the door switch ON signals are input while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated, the saver MA
is discontinued and restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the headlamps will be turned off.
I Exterior battery saver control time can be changed using “WORK SUPPORT” mode in “HEADLAMP”.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after headlamps are turned to off by the exterior lamp
EM
battery saver control, ground is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and then, LC
I to headlamp LH and RH relays terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59,
I through smart entrance control unit terminals 22 and 60 and
I through lighting switch terminal 12. EC
Then headlamps illuminate again.
AUTO LIGHT OPERATION FE
NAEL0255S06
The auto light control system has an auto light sensor inside instrument mask that detects outside brightness.
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 23 CL
I from lighting switch terminal 42.
When ignition switch is turned to ″ON″ or “START” position and
I Outside brightness is darker than prescribed level. MT
After 3 seconds delay, outside brightness becomes darker than prescribed level.
Ground is supplied AT
I to headlamp relay LH and RH terminals 2
I through smart entrance control unit terminals 21, 59 and 43, 64.
Then both headlamp relays and tail lamp relay are energized, headlamps (low or high) and tail lamps are illu- TF
minated according to switch position.
Auto light operation allows headlamps and tail lamps to go off when
I Outside brightness is brighter than prescribed level, or
PD
I After 5 seconds delay, outside brightness is brighter than prescribed level.
I Ignition switch is turned to “OFF” position. (Headlamp will be turned OFF by exterior lamp battery saver AX
control system. Refer to EL-32.)
NOTE:
The delay time changes (maximum of 20 seconds) as the outside brightness changes. SU
For parking license and tail lamp auto operation, refer to “PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS”.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM BR
NAEL0255S07
The vehicle security system will flash the high beams if the system is triggered. Refer to “VEHICLE SECU-
RITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM” (EL-342).
ST

IDX

EL-33
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Schematic

Schematic NAEL0256

MEL390P

EL-34
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —

Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP — NAEL0257

MEL389P
IDX

EL-35
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP — (Cont’d)

MEL391P

EL-36
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP — (Cont’d)

MEL853N

IDX

EL-37
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP — (Cont’d)

MEL392P

EL-38
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure

CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure NAEL0258

GI
“HEADLAMP” NAEL0258S01
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
MA
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to the data link connector.

LC
SEL331X

3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. EC

4. Touch “START”.
FE

MT
PBR455D
AT
5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.

SEL398Y SU
6. Touch “HEADLAMP”.
BR

SEL401Y BT
7. Select diagnosis mode.
“DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT” HA
are available.

IDX
SEL400Y

EL-39
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
CONSULT-II Application Items

CONSULT-II Application Items NAEL0453

“HEAD LAMP” NAEL0453S01
Data Monitor NAEL0453S0101

Monitored Item Description

IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ON position.

ACC ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position.

Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal.
AUTO LIGT SW
(AUTO position: ON/Other than AUTO position: OFF)

Displays “Illumination outside of the vehicle (close to 5V when light/close to 0V when dark)” as
AUTO LIGT SENS
judged from the optical sensor signal.

Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal.
LIGHT SW 1ST
(1ST or 2ND position: ON/Other than 1ST and 2ND position: OFF)

Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal.
LIGHT SW 2ND
(2ND position: ON/Other than 2ND position: OFF)

DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.

DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door switch RH.

DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch.

Active Test NAEL0453S0102

Test Item Description

TAIL LAMP Tail lamp relay can be operated by on-off operation of the tail lamp.

HEAD LAMP Headlamp relay can be operated by on-off operation of the headlamp.

AUTO LIGHT Night time dimming signal can be operated by on-off operation.

Work Support NAEL0453S0103

Work Item Description

Auto light sensitivity can be changed in this mode. Sensitivity can be adjusted in four modes.
AUTO LIGHT SET
I MODE 1 (Normal)/MODE 2 (Sensitive)/MODE 3 (Desensitized)/MODE 4 (Insensitive)

Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed in this mode. Selects exterior lamp
BATTERY SAVER SET battery saver control mode between two modes.
I MODE 1 (ON)/MODE 2 (OFF)

Exterior lamp battery saver control time can be changed in this mode. Selects exterior lamp bat-
tery saver control time among eight modes.
ILL DELAY SET
I MODE 1 (45 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF)/MODE 3 (30 sec.)/MODE 4 (60 sec.)/ MODE 5 (90 sec.)/
MODE 6 (120 sec.)/MODE 7 (150 sec.)/MODE 8 (180 sec.)

Trouble Diagnoses NAEL0260

Symptom Possible cause Repair order

Neither headlamp operates. 1. 7.5A fuse 1. Check 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block
2. Headlamp relay circuit (J/B)].
3. Lighting switch Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
4. Smart entrance control unit 49 of smart entrance control unit.
2. Check between smart entrance control unit and
headlamp relays (LH and RH).
3. Check Lighting switch.
4. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-378)

EL-40
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

Symptom Possible cause Repair order GI

Headlamp LH (low and high beam) 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse (No. 60, located in fusible link and
does not operate, but headlamp 2. Headlamp LH relay fuse box). Verify battery positive voltage is present MA
RH (low and high beam) does 3. Headlamp LH relay circuit at terminals 1 and 3 of headlamp LH relay.
operate. 2. Check headlamp LH relay.
3. Check harness between headlamp LH relay and
smart entrance control unit.
EM
Headlamp RH (low and high beam) 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse (No. 59, located in fusible link and
does not operate, but headlamp LH 2. Headlamp RH relay fuse box). Verify battery positive voltage is present LC
(low and high beam) does operate. 3. Headlamp RH relay circuit at terminals 1 and 3 of headlamp RH relay.
2. Check headlamp RH relay.
3. Check harness between headlamp RH relay and EC
smart entrance control unit.

LH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

but LH low beam operates. 2. Open in the LH high beam cir- 2. Check harness between headlamp LH and lighting FE
cuit switch for open circuit.
3. Lighting switch 3. Check lighting switch.
CL
LH low beam does not operate, but 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.
LH high beam operates. 2. Open in LH low beam circuit 2. Check harness between headlamp LH and lighting
3. Lighting switch switch for open circuit.
3. Check lighting switch.
MT
RH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.
but RH low beam operates. 2. Open in the RH high beam cir- 2. Check harness between headlamp RH and lighting AT
cuit switch for open circuit.
3. Lighting switch 3. Check lighting switch.

RH low beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

TF
but RH high beam operates. 2. Open in RH low beam circuit 2. Check harness between headlamp RH and lighting
3. Lighting switch switch for open circuit.
3. Check lighting switch. PD
High beam indicator does not work. 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb in combination meter.
2. Open in high beam circuit 2. Check the following. AX
a. Harness between headlamp LH relay and combina-
tion meter for an open circuit
b. Harness between high beam indicator and lighting
switch
SU
Battery saver control does not 1. Door switch LH or RH circuit 1. Check the following.
operate properly. 2. Lighting switch circuit a. Harness between smart entrance control unit and BR
3. Smart entrance control unit LH or RH door switch for open or short circuit.
b. LH or RH door switch ground circuit.
c. LH or RH door switch. ST
2. Check the following.
a. Harness between smart entrance control unit termi-
nals 20 or 58 and lighting switch terminal 11 for
open or short circuit.
RS
b. Harness between lighting switch terminal 5 and
ground.
c. Lighting switch. BT
3. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-378)

IDX

EL-41
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

Symptom Possible cause Repair order

When outside is dark, neither tail 1. 7.5A fuse 1. Check 7.5A fuse [NO. 11 located in fuse block (J/B)].
lamp nor headlamp turn on by auto 2. Lighting switch “AUTO” check Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
light operation. 3. Lighting switch circuit check 27 of smart entrance control unit.
4. Lighting switch ground circuit 2. Check lighting switch (AUTO) input signal with
check “CONSULT-II” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
5. Auto light sensor check When lighting switch is in AUTO:
6. Auto light sensor circuit check AUTO LIGHT SWITCH ON
When lighting switch is in OFF:
AUTO LIGHT SWITCH OFF
3. Check harness for open or short between smart
entrance control unit and lighting switch.
4. Check harness for lighting switch and ground.
5. Check auto light sensor input signal.
(With CONSULT-II)
See “AUTO LIGHT SENSOR” in DATA MONITOR
mode. When auto light sensor in stuck by light:
More than 3V
When auto light sensor is not stuck by light:
Approx. 0.5V
(Without CONSULT-II)
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit
terminal 7 and ground. Refer to smart entrance con-
trol unit. (EL-378)
6. Check the following.
a. Harness for open or short between smart entrance
control unit terminal 8 and auto light sensor terminal
1
b. Harness for open or short between smart entrance
control unit terminal 7 and auto light sensor terminal
2
c. Harness for open or short between smart entrance
control unit terminals 9 and 3

When outside is dark, tail lamp Auto light output check Check auto light output.
turns on but headlamp does not (With CONSULT-II)
turn on by auto light operation. See “HEADLAMP” and “TAIL LAMP” in ACTIVE TEST
mode, and headlamp switch to AUTO position.
Headlamp and tail lamp should turn on.
(Without CONSULT-II)
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit ter-
minals 19, 21, 57, 59 and ground. Refer to smart
entrance control unit. (EL-378)

When outside is dark, headlamp Auto light output check Check auto light output.
turns on but tail lamp does not turn (With CONSULT-II)
on by auto light operation. See “HEADLAMP” and “TAIL LAMP” in ACTIVE TEST
mode, and headlamp switch to AUTO position.
Headlamp and tail lamp should turn on.
(Without CONSULT-II)
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit ter-
minals 19, 21, 57, 59 and ground. Refer to smart
entrance control unit. (EL-378)

Light does not turn off when igni- 1. 7.5A fuse 1. Check 7.5A fuse [NO. 11 located in fuse block (J/B)].
tion key switch is turned to “OFF” 2. IGN switch circuit Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
(exterior battery saver control is 27 of smart entrance control unit.
canceled). 2. Check harness for open or short between smart
entrance control unit and fuse.

EL-42
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

Symptom Possible cause Repair order GI

When outside is bright, neither tail Auto light sensor check Check auto light sensor input signal.
lamps nor headlamps turn off by (With CONSULT-II) MA
auto light operation. See “AUTO LIGHT SENSOR” in DATA MONITOR
mode. When auto light sensor in stuck by light:
More than 3V
When auto light sensor is not stuck by light:
EM
Approx. 0.5V
(Without CONSULT-II)
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit ter- LC
minal 7 (W/G) and ground. Refer to smart entrance
control unit. (EL-378)
EC

AT
Bulb Replacement NAEL0261
The headlamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replace-
able halogen bulb. The bulb can be replaced from the engine com- TF
partment side without removing the headlamp body.
I Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never
touch the glass envelope. PD
1. Disconnect the battery cable.
2. Disconnect the harness connector from the back side of the AX
bulb.
3. Pull off the rubber cap.
4. Remove the headlamp bulb carefully. Do not shake or rotate SU
the bulb when removing it.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
BR
CAUTION:
Do not leave headlamp reflector without bulb for a long period
of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering headlamp body ST
may affect the performance of the headlamp. Remove head-
lamp bulb from the headlamp reflector just before a replace-
ment bulb is installed. RS

SEL107X
BT
Aiming Adjustment NAEL0262
Before performing aiming adjustment, check the following. HA
For details, refer to the regulations in your own country.
1) Keep all tires inflated to correct pressures.
SC
2) Place vehicle flat surface.
3) See that there is no-load in vehicle (coolant, engine oil filled up
to correct level and full fuel tank) other than the driver (or
equivalent weight placed in driver’s position).

IDX

EL-43
HEADLAMP (FOR USA)
Aiming Adjustment (Cont’d)
LOW BEAM NAEL0262S01
1. Remove aiming adjusting screw cap.
2. Turn headlamp low beam on.
3. Use adjusting screws to perform aiming adjustment.
I First tighten the adjusting screw all the way and then
make adjustment by loosening the screw.

MEL222P

SEL376X

If the vehicle front body has been repaired and/or the headlamp
assembly has been replaced, check aiming. Use the aiming chart
shown in the figure.
I Basic illuminating area for adjustment should be within
the range shown on the aiming chart. Adjust headlamps
accordingly.

EL-44
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location

Component Parts and Harness Connector GI

Location NAEL0263

PD
SEL288Y

System Description AX
NAEL0264
The headlamp system for Canada vehicles contains a daytime light control unit that activates the high beam
headlamps at approximately half illumination whenever the engine is running. If the parking brake is applied
before the engine is started the daytime lights will not be illuminated. The daytime lights will illuminate once SU
the parking brake is released. Thereafter, the daytime lights will continue to operate when the parking brake
is applied.
And battery saver system is controlled by the smart entrance control unit.
BR
Power is supplied at all times
I to headlamp LH relay terminals 1 and 3 ST
I through 15A fuse (No. 60, located in the fuse and fusible link box), and
I to headlamp RH relay terminals 1 and 3
I through 15A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and fusible link box), and RS
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 49
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. BT
Ground is supplied
I to daytime light control unit terminal 16 and
I to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64 HA
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is also supplied
I to daytime light control unit terminal 3, and SC
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 27
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 26
I through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. IDX
When the ignition switch is in the START position, power is supplied
EL-45
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
System Description (Cont’d)
I to daytime light control unit terminal 2
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 26, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
HEADLAMP OPERATION NAEL0264S01
Power Supply to Low Beam and High Beam NAEL0264S0101
When lighting switch is in 2ND or PASS position, ground is supplied
I to headlamp relay (LH and RH) terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59
I through smart entrance control unit terminals 22 and 60
I from lighting switch terminal 12.
Headlamp relays (LH and RH) are energized and then power is supplied to headlamps (LH and RH).
Low Beam Operation NAEL0264S0102
When the lighting switch is turned to 2ND and LOW (“B”) positions, ground is supplied
I to terminal 2 of the headlamp LH
I through daytime light control unit terminals 11 and 15
I through lighting switch terminals 7 and 5
I through body grounds E13 and E41.
Ground is also supplied
I to terminal 2 of the headlamp RH
I through daytime light control unit terminals 8 and 12
I through lighting switch terminals 10 and 8
I through body grounds E13 and E41.
With power and ground supplied, the low beam headlamps illuminate.
High Beam Operation/Flash-to-pass Operation NAEL0264S0103
When the lighting switch is turned to 2ND and HIGH (“A”) or PASS (“C”) positions, ground is supplied
I to terminal 1 of headlamp LH
I through daytime light control unit terminals 10 and 13, and
I to combination meter terminal 27 for the HIGH BEAM indicator
I through lighting switch terminals 6 and 5
I through body grounds E13 and E41.
Ground is also supplied
I to terminal 1 of headlamp RH
I through daytime light control unit terminals 9 and 14
I through lighting switch terminals 9 and 8
I through body grounds E13 and E41.
With power and ground supplied, the high beam headlamps and HIGH BEAM indicator illuminate.
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL NAEL0264S02
Except for Auto Light Control Operation NAEL0264S0201
Headlamps will remain on for a short while after the ignition switch is turned from ON (or ACC) to OFF.
Continuity between terminals 21 and 22, and between terminals 59 and 60 of smart entrance control unit will
be disturbed after 5 minutes, then the headlamps will be turned off.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after headlamps are turned to off by the exterior lamp
battery saver control, ground is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and then,
I to headlamp LH and RH relays terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59,
I through smart entrance control unit terminals 22 and 60 and
I through lighting switch terminal 12.
Then headlamps illuminate again.
Auto light control operation NAEL0264S0202
While the headlamps are turned ON by “AUTO” operation, the exterior lamp battery saver is activated for 5
minutes when the ignition switch is turned from ON (or ACC) to OFF, and either LH or RH front door switch
is opened.
The smart entrance control unit controls exterior lamp battery saver activation as follows:
EL-46
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
System Description (Cont’d)
I When the door switch signal changes from ON to OFF while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated, GI
the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the headlamps will be turned off.
I When the door switch signal changes from OFF to ON while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated,
the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the headlamps will be turned off. MA
I When the one of four door switch signals changes from OFF to ON while the exterior lamp battery saver
is activated, the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 5 minutes, then the headlamps will be
turned off. EM
I When all the door switch ON signals are input while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated, the saver
is discontinued and restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the headlamps will be turned off.
LC
I Exterior battery saver control time can be changed using “WORK SUPPORT” mode in “HEADLAMP”.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after headlamps are turned to off by the exterior lamp
battery saver control, ground is supplied EC
I to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and then,
I to headlamp LH and RH relays terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59,
I through smart entrance control unit terminals 22 and 60 and
FE
I through lighting switch terminal 12.
Then headlamps illuminate again. CL
AUTO LIGHT OPERATION NAEL0264S03
For auto light operation, refer to “HEADLAMP” (EL-33). MT
DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION NAEL0264S04
With the engine running, the lighting switch in the OFF or 1ST position and parking brake released, power is AT
supplied
I through daytime light control unit terminal 7
I to terminal 3 of headlamp RH TF
I through terminal 1 of headlamp RH
I to daytime light control unit terminal 9
PD
I through daytime light control unit terminal 6
I to terminal 3 of headlamp LH.
Ground is supplied to terminal 1 of headlamp LH. AX
I through daytime light control unit terminals 10 and 16
I through body grounds E13 and E41. SU
Because the high beam headlamps are now wired in series, they operate at half illumination.
OPERATION NAEL0264S05 BR
After starting the engine with the lighting switch in the “OFF” or “1ST” position, the headlamp high beam auto-
matically turns on. Lighting switch operations other than the above are the same as conventional light sys-
tems. ST
Engine With engine stopped With engine running

OFF 1ST 2ND OFF 1ST 2ND RS

Lighting switch
A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C

High beam X X O X X O O X O g* g* O g* g* O O X O BT
Headlamp
Low beam X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X O X

Clearance and tail lamp X X X O O O O O O X X X O O O O O O HA

License and instrument illumination
X X X O O O O O O X X X O O O O O O
lamp SC
A: “HIGH BEAM” position
B: “LOW BEAM” position
C: “FLASH TO PASS” position
O : Lamp “ON”
X : Lamp “OFF”
g : Lamp dims. (Added functions)
IDX

EL-47
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
System Description (Cont’d)
*: When starting the engine with the parking brake released, the daytime light will come ON.
When starting the engine with the parking brake pulled, the daytime light won’t come ON.

EL-48
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Schematic

Schematic NAEL0265
GI

MEL393P
IDX

EL-49
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Wiring Diagram — DTRL —

Wiring Diagram — DTRL — NAEL0266

MEL394P

EL-50
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Wiring Diagram — DTRL — (Cont’d)

MEL395P

IDX

EL-51
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Wiring Diagram — DTRL — (Cont’d)

MEL396P

EL-52
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Wiring Diagram — DTRL — (Cont’d)

MEL857N

IDX

EL-53
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Wiring Diagram — DTRL — (Cont’d)

MEL397P

EL-54
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure

CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure NAEL0267

GI
“HEADLAMP” NAEL0267S01
Refer to “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)” (EL-39).
MA

CONSULT-II Application Items EC

NAEL0268
“HEADLAMP” NAEL0268S01
Refer to “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)” (EL-40). FE

AT
Trouble Diagnoses NAEL0269

Symptom Possible cause Repair order TF

Neither headlamp operates. 1. 7.5A fuse 1. Check 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block
2. Lighting switch (J/B)].
3. Smart entrance control unit Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal PD
49 of smart entrance control unit.
2. Check Lighting switch.
3. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-378) AX
LH headlamp (low and high beam) 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse (No. 60, located in fusible link and
does not operate, but RH head- 2. Headlamp LH relay fuse box). Verify battery positive voltage is present
lamp (low and high beam) does 3. Headlamp LH relay circuit at terminal 1 and 3 of headlamp LH relay.
SU
operate. 4. Headlamp LH ground circuit 2. Check headlamp LH relay.
5. Lighting switch circuit 3. Check the following.
6. Daytime light control unit a. Harness between headlamp LH relay and daytime BR
7. Smart entrance control unit light control unit.
b. Harness between headlamp LH relay and smart
entrance control unit. ST
4. Harness between headlamp LH and daytime light
control unit.
5. Check harness between smart entrance control unit RS
and lighting switch.
6. Check daytime light control unit. (EL-58)
7. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-378) BT

IDX

EL-55
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

Symptom Possible cause Repair order

RH headlamp (low and high beam) 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse (No. 59, located in fusible link and
does not operate, but LH headlamp 2. Headlamp RH relay fuse box). Verify battery positive voltage is present
(low and high beam) does operate. 3. Headlamp RH relay circuit at terminals 1 and 3 of headlamp RH relay.
4. Headlamp RH ground circuit 2. Check headlamp RH relay.
5. Lighting switch circuit 3. Check the following.
6. Daytime light control unit a. Harness between headlamp RH relay and daytime
7. Smart entrance control unit light control unit.
b. Harness between headlamp RH relay and smart
entrance control unit.
4. Harness between headlamp RH and daytime light
control unit.
5. Check harness between smart entrance control unit
and lighting switch.
6. Check daytime light control unit. (EL-58)
7. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-378)

LH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

but LH low beam operates. 2. Headlamp LH high beams cir- 2. Check harness between LH headlamp and daytime
cuit light control unit.
3. Lighting switch 3. Check lighting switch.
4. Lighting switch circuit 4. Check harness between daytime light control unit
5. Daytime light control unit and lighting switch.
5. Check daytime light control unit. (EL-58)

LH low beam does not operate, but 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

LH high beam operates. 2. Headlamp LH high beams cir- 2. Check harness between LH headlamp and daytime
cuit light control unit.
3. Lighting switch 3. Check lighting switch.
4. Lighting switch circuit 4. Check harness between daytime light control unit
5. Daytime light control unit and lighting switch.
5. Check daytime light control unit. (EL-58)

RH high beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

but RH low beam operates. 2. Open in the RH high beams 2. Check harness between RH headlamp and daytime
circuit light control unit.
3. Lighting switch 3. Check lighting switch.
4. Lighting switch circuit 4. Check harness between daytime light control unit
5. Daytime light control unit and lighting switch.
5. Check daytime light control unit. (EL-58)

RH low beam does not operate, 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

but RH high beam operates. 2. Open in the RH high beams 2. Check harness between RH headlamp and daytime
circuit light control unit.
3. Lighting switch 3. Check lighting switch.
4. Lighting switch circuit 4. Check harness between daytime light control unit
5. Daytime light control unit and lighting switch.
5. Check daytime light control unit. (EL-58)

High beam indicator does not work. 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb in combination meter.
2. Open in high beam circuit 2. Check the following.
a. Harness between headlamp LH relay and combina-
tion meter for an open circuit.
b. Harness between high beam indicator and lighting
switch.

Battery saver control does not 1. Door switch LH or RH circuit 1. Check the following.
operate properly. 2. Smart entrance control unit a. Harness between smart entrance control unit and
LH or RH door switch for open or short circuit.
b. LH or RH door switch ground circuit.
c. LH or RH door switch.
2. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-378)

EL-56
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

Symptom Possible cause Repair order GI

Daytime light control does not 1. Fuse check 1. Check the following.
operate properly. 2. Parking brake switch a. 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in fuse block (J/B)]. Verify MA
3. Parking brake switch circuit battery positive voltage is present at terminal 3 of
4. Alternator circuit daytime light control unit.
5. Daytime light control unit b. 7.5A fuse [No. 26, located in fuse block (J/B)]. Verify
battery positive voltage is present at terminal 2 of
EM
daytime light control unit.
2. Check parking brake switch.
3. Check harness between parking brake switch and LC
daytime light control unit.
4. Check harness between alternator and daytime light
control unit. EC
5. Check daytime light control unit. (EL-58)

When outside is dark, neither tail 1. 7.5A fuse 1. Check 7.5A fuse [NO. 11 located in fuse block (J/B)]. FE
lamp nor headlamp turn on by auto 2. Lighting switch “AUTO” check Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
light operation. 3. Lighting switch circuit check 27 of smart entrance control unit.
4. Lighting switch ground circuit 2. Check lighting switch (AUTO) input signal with
check “CONSULT-II” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. CL
5. Auto light sensor check When lighting switch is in AUTO:
6. Auto light sensor circuit check AUTO LIGHT SWITCH ON
When lighting switch is in OFF: MT
AUTO LIGHT SWITCH OFF
3. Check harness for open or short between smart
entrance control unit and lighting switch. AT
4. Check harness for lighting switch and ground.
5. Check auto light sensor input signal.
(With CONSULT-II) TF
See “AUTO LIGHT SENSOR” in DATA MONITOR
mode. When auto light sensor in stuck by light:
More than 3V
When auto light sensor is not stuck by light:
PD
Approx. 0.5V
(Without CONSULT-II)
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit AX
terminal 7 and ground. Refer to smart entrance con-
trol unit. (EL-378)
6. Check the following. SU
a. Harness for open or short between smart entrance
control unit terminal 8 and auto light sensor terminal
1 BR
b. Harness for open or short between smart entrance
control unit terminal 7 and auto light sensor terminal
2 ST
c. Harness for open or short between smart entrance
control unit terminal 9 and 3

When outside is dark, tail lamp Auto light output check Check auto light output. RS
turns on but headlamp does not (With CONSULT-II)
turn on by auto light operation. See “HEADLAMP” and “TAIL LAMP” in ACTIVE TEST
mode, and headlamp switch to AUTO position. BT
Headlamp and tail lamp should turn on.
(Without CONSULT-II)
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit ter- HA
minals 19, 21, 57, 59 and ground. Refer to smart
entrance control unit. (EL-378)
SC

IDX

EL-57
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

Symptom Possible cause Repair order

When outside is bright, neither tail Auto light sensor check Check auto light sensor input signal.
lamps nor headlamps turn off by (With CONSULT-II)
auto light operation. See “AUTO LIGHT SENSOR” in DATA MONITOR
mode. When auto light sensor in stuck by light:
More than 3V
When auto light sensor is not stuck by light:
Approx. 0.5V
(Without CONSULT-II)
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit ter-
minal 7 (W/G) and ground. Refer to smart entrance
control unit. (EL-378)

DAYTIME LIGHT CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE NAEL0269S01

Terminal Wire Voltage

Item Condition
No. color (Approximate values)

1 Y/B Alternator When turning ignition switch to “ON” Less than 1V

When engine is running Battery voltage

When turning ignition switch to “OFF” Less than 1V

2 Y/R Start signal When turning ignition switch to “ST” Battery voltage

When turning ignition switch to “ON” from “ST” Less than 1V

When turning ignition switch to “OFF” Less than 1V

3 G Power source When turning ignition switch to “ON” Battery voltage

When turning ignition switch to “ST” Battery voltage

When turning ignition switch to “OFF” Less than 1V

EL-58
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

Terminal Wire Voltage GI

Item Condition
No. color (Approximate values)

4 R/L Power source When turning ignition switch to “ON” Battery voltage MA

When turning ignition switch to “OFF” Battery voltage EM

5 R/W Power source When turning ignition switch to “ON” Battery voltage LC

When turning ignition switch to “OFF” Battery voltage EC

6 R LH hi beam When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with Battery voltage
FE
“HI BEAM” position

When releasing parking brake with engine running and Approx. half battery CL
turning lighting switch to “OFF” (daytime light operation) voltage
CAUTION:
Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P MT
position.

7 L/R RH hi beam When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with Battery voltage AT
“HI BEAM” position

When releasing parking brake with engine running and Battery voltage TF
turning lighting switch to “OFF” (daytime light operation)
CAUTION:
Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P
position.
PD

9 PU RH hi beam When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with Less than 1V AX
(ground) “HI BEAM” position

When releasing parking brake with engine running and Approx. half battery
turning lighting switch to “OFF” (daytime light operation) voltage SU
CAUTION:
Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P
position. BR

10 GY LH hi beam When lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position with Less than 1V ST
(ground) “HI BEAM” position

When releasing parking brake with engine running and Less than 1V
turning lighting switch to “OFF” (daytime light operation) RS
CAUTION:
Block wheels and ensure selector lever is in N or P
position. BT

13 L/W Lighting switch When turning lighting switch to “HI BEAM” Less than 1V
14 W/R (Hi beam) HA
When turning lighting switch to “FLASH TO PASS” Less than 1V

16 B Ground — —
SC
17 L/G Parking brake When parking brake is released Battery voltage
switch
When parking brake is set Less than 1.5V

IDX

EL-59
HEADLAMP (FOR CANADA) — DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM —
Bulb Replacement

Bulb Replacement NAEL0270

Refer to “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)” (EL-43).

Aiming Adjustment NAEL0271

Refer to “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)” (EL-43).

EL-60
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
System Description

System Description NAEL0272

GI
The parking, license and tail lamp operation is controlled by the lighting switch which is built into the combi-
nation switch and smart entrance control unit. The battery saver system is controlled by the smart entrance
control unit. MA
Power is supplied at all times
I to tail lamp relay terminals 1 and 3
EM
I through 10A fuse (No. 61, located in the fuse and fusible link box), and
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 49
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. LC
When ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 27 EC
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 26 FE
I through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Ground is supplied CL
I to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64
I through body grounds M77 and M111.
MT
LIGHTING OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH NAEL0272S01
When lighting switch is in 1ST (or 2ND) position, ground is supplied
I to tail lamp relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57 AT
I through smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58, and
I through lighting switch and body grounds E13 and E41. TF
Tail lamp relay is then energized and the parking, license and tail lamps illuminate.
LIGHTING OPERATION BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM NAEL0272S02 PD
When lighting switch is in AUTO position, ground is supplied
I to tail lamp relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57
I through smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64, and AX
I to body grounds M77 and M111.
Tail lamp relay is then energized and the parking, license and tail lamps illuminate. SU
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL NAEL0272S03
Except for Auto Light Control Operation NAEL0272S0301 BR
Parking, license and tail lamps will remain on for a short while after the ignition switch is turned from ON (or
ACC) to OFF.
Continuity between terminals 21 and 22, and between terminals 59 and 60 of smart entrance control unit will ST
be disturbed after 5 minutes, then the headlamps will be turned off.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after parking, license and tail lamps headlamps are turned
to off by the exterior lamp battery saver control, ground is supplied RS
I to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and then,
I to headlamp LH and RH relays terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59,
I through smart entrance control unit terminals 22 and 60 and BT
I through lighting switch terminal 12.
Then parking, license and tail lamps illuminate again. HA
Auto light control operation NAEL0272S0302
While the parking, license and tail lamps are turned ON by “AUTO” operation, the exterior lamp battery saver SC
is activated for 5 minutes when the ignition switch is turned from ON (or ACC) to OFF, and either LH or RH
front door switch is opened.
The smart entrance control unit controls exterior lamp battery saver activation as follows:
I When the door switch signal changes from ON to OFF while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated,
the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the parking, license and tail lamps
will be turned off. IDX
I When the door switch signal changes from OFF to ON while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated,
EL-61
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
System Description (Cont’d)
the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the parking, license and tail lamps
will be turned off.
I When the one of four door switch signals changes from OFF to ON while the exterior lamp battery saver
is activated, the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 5 minutes seconds, then the parking,
license and tail lamps will be turned off.
I When all the door switch ON signals are input while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated, the
operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the parking, license and tail lamps will
be turned off.
I Exterior battery saver control time can be changed using “WORK SUPPORT” mode in “HEADLAMP”.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after parking, license and tail lamps are turned to off by
the exterior lamp battery saver control, ground is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and then,
I to tail lamp relays terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59,
I through smart entrance control unit terminals 22 and 60 and
I through lighting switch terminal 12.
Then parking, license and tail lamps illuminate again.

EL-62
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
Schematic

Schematic NAEL0273
GI

MEL515P
IDX

EL-63
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —

Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L — NAEL0274

MEL398P

EL-64
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L — (Cont’d)

MEL403P

IDX

EL-65
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L — (Cont’d)

MEL553P

EL-66
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L — (Cont’d)

MEL404P

IDX

EL-67
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure

CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure NAEL0275

“HEADLAMP” NAEL0275S01
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to the data link connector.

SEL331X

3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

4. Touch “START”.

PBR455D

5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.

SEL398Y

6. Touch “HEADLAMP”.

SEL401Y

7. Select diagnosis mode.

“DATA MONITOR” and “ACTIVE TEST” are available.

SEL400Y

EL-68
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
CONSULT-II Application Items

CONSULT-II Application Items NAEL0454

GI
“HEADLAMP” NAEL0454S01
Data Monitor NAEL0454S0101 MA
Monitored Item Description

IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ON position. EM

ACC ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position.

Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal. LC
AUTO LIGT SW
(AUTO position: ON/Other than AUTO position: OFF)

Displays “Illumination outside of the vehicle (close to 5V when light/close to 0V when dark)” as EC
AUTO LIGT SENS
judged from the optical sensor signal.

Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal.
LIGHT SW 1ST FE
(1ST or 2ND position: ON/Other than 1ST and 2ND position: OFF)

Displays status of the lighting switch as judged from the lighting switch signal.
LIGHT SW 2ND
(2ND position: ON/Other than 2ND position: OFF)
CL
DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.

DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door switch RH. MT

DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch.

Active Test AT
NAEL0454S0102

Test Item Description

TF
TAIL LAMP Tail lamp relay can be operated by on-off operation of the tail lamp.

HEAD LAMP Headlamp relay can be operated by on-off operation of the headlamp.
PD
AUTO LIGHT Night time dimming signal can be operated by on-off operation.

Work Support NAEL0454S0103

AX
Work Item Description

Auto light sensitivity can be changed in this mode. Sensitivity can be adjusted in four modes.
SU
AUTO LIGHT SET
I MODE 1 (Normal)/MODE 2 (Sensitive)/MODE 3 (Desensitized)/MODE 4 (Insensitive)

Exterior lamp battery saver control mode can be changed in this mode. Selects exterior lamp BR
BATTERY SAVER SET battery saver control mode between two modes.
I MODE 1 (ON)/MODE 2 (OFF)

Auto light delay off timer period can be changed in this mode. Selects auto light delay off timer
ST
period among eight modes.
ILL DELAY SET
I MODE 1 (45 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF)/MODE 3 (30 sec.)/MODE 4 (60 sec.)/ MODE 5 (90 sec.)/
MODE 6 (120 sec.)/MODE 7 (150 sec.)/MODE 8 (180 sec.) RS

BT
Trouble Diagnoses NAEL0277
HA
Symptom Possible cause Repair order

No lamps operate (including head- 1. 7.5A fuse 1. Check 7.5A fuse [No. 24, lacated in fuse block
lamps). 2. Lighting switch (J/B)]. Verify battery positive voltage is present at SC
3. Smart entrance control unit terminal 49 of smart entrance control unit.
2. Check lighting switch.
3. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-378)

IDX

EL-69
PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

Symptom Possible cause Repair order

No parking, license and tail lamps 1. 10A fuse 1. Check 10A fuse (No. 61, located in fusible and fuse
operate, but headlamps do oper- 2. Tail lamp relay block). Verify battery positive voltage is present at
ate. 3. Tail lamp relay circuit terminals 1 and 3 of tail lamp relay.
4. Lighting switch 2. Check tail lamp relay.
5. Lighting switch circuit 3. Check the following.
6. Smart entrance control unit a. Harness between smart entrance control unit termi-
nals 19 and 57 and tail lamp relay terminal 2
b. Harness between tail lamp relay terminal 5 and fuse
block.
4. Check lighting switch.
5. Check the following.
a. Harness between lighting switch terminal 11 and
smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58.
b. Harness between lighting switch terminal 5 and
ground.
6. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-378)

Exterior lamp battery saver control 1. Driver, passenger or rear door 1. Check the following.
does not operate properly. switch circuit a. Harness between smart entrance control unit and
2. Smart entrance control unit driver, passenger or rear door switch for open or
short circuit.
b. Driver passenger or rear door switch ground circuit.
c. Driver, passenger or rear door switch.
2. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-378)

Auto light malfunctioning — Refer to trouble diagnosis in “HEADLAMP”. (EL-40)

EL-70
STOP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — STOP/L —

Wiring Diagram — STOP/L — NAEL0278

MEL777L
IDX

EL-71
STOP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — STOP/L — (Cont’d)

MEL262M

EL-72
BACK-UP LAMP
Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —

Wiring Diagram — BACK/L — NAEL0279

MEL006M
IDX

EL-73
FRONT FOG LAMP
System Description

System Description NAEL0280

OUTLINE NAEL0280S01
Power is supplied at all times
I to headlamp RH relay terminals 1 and 3
I through 15A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and fusible link box), and
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 49
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)], and
I to front fog lamp relay terminal 3
I through 15A fuse (No. 53, located in the fuse and fusible link box).
When ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 27
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 26
I through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Ground is supplied to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64.
When lighting switch is in 2ND position, ground is supplied
I to headlamp RH relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59.
I through smart entrance control unit terminals 22 and 60,
I through lighting switch terminal 12, and
I through body grounds E13 and E41.
Headlamp RH relay is then energized.
FOG LAMP OPERATION NAEL0280S02
The front fog lamp switch is built into the combination switch. The lighting switch must be in the 2ND position
and LOW (“B”) position for front fog lamp operation.
With the front fog lamp switch in the ON position, ground is supplied
I to front fog lamp relay terminal 1
I through the front fog lamp switch, lighting switch and body grounds E13 and E41.
The front fog lamp relay is energized and power is supplied
I from front fog lamp relay terminal 5
I to terminal 1 of each front fog lamp.
Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of each front fog lamp through body grounds E13 and E41.
With power and ground supplied, the front fog lamps illuminate.
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL NAEL0280S03
Front fog lamps will remain on for a short while after the ignition switch is turned from ON (or ACC) to OFF.
Continuity between terminals 21 and 22, and between terminals 59 and 60 of smart entrance control unit will
be disturbed after 5 minutes, then the front fog lamps will be turned off.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after front fog lamps are turned off by the battery saver
control, ground is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and then
I to headlamp RH relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminal 21
I through smart entrance control unit terminal 22 from lighting switch terminal 12.
Then the front fog lamps illuminate again.
NOTE:
For Trouble Diagnoses for battery saver control, refer to “HEADLAMP (FOR USA)”, EL-40.

EL-74
FRONT FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —

Wiring Diagram — F/FOG — NAEL0281

MEL523P
IDX

EL-75
FRONT FOG LAMP
Wiring Diagram — F/FOG — (Cont’d)

MEL584P

EL-76
FRONT FOG LAMP
Aiming Adjustment

Aiming Adjustment NAEL0282

GI
Before performing aiming adjustment, make sure of the following.
1) Keep all tires inflated to correct pressure.
2) Place vehicle on level ground.
MA
3) See that vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant,
engine oil and fuel, and spare tire, jack, and tools). Have the EM
driver or equivalent weight placed in driver’s seat.
Adjust aiming in the vertical direction by turning the adjusting
screw. LC
MEL917O

1. Set the distance between the screen and the center of the fog EC
lamp lens as shown at left.
2. Turn front fog lamps ON.
FE

MT
MEL327G
AT
3. Adjust front fog lamps so that the top edge of the high inten-
sity zone is 200 mm (7.9 in) below the height of the fog lamp
centers as shown at left. TF
I When performing adjustment, if necessary, cover the head-
lamps and opposite fog lamp.
PD

MEL328GA
BT

IDX

EL-77
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
System Description

System Description NAEL0283

TURN SIGNAL OPERATION NAEL0283S01
With the hazard switch in the OFF position and the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is sup-
plied
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to hazard switch terminal 2
I through terminal 1 of the hazard switch
I to combination flasher unit terminal 1
I through terminal 3 of the combination flasher unit
I to turn signal switch terminal 1.
Ground is supplied to combination flasher unit terminal 2 through body grounds M4, M66 and M147.
LH Turn NAEL0283S0101
When the turn signal switch is moved to the LH position, power is supplied from turn signal switch terminal 3
to
I front turn signal lamp LH terminal 2
I combination meter terminal 25
I rear combination lamp LH terminal 5.
Ground is supplied to the front turn signal lamp LH terminal 1 through body grounds E13 and E41.
Ground is supplied to the rear combination lamp LH terminal 6 through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 30 through body grounds M4, M66 and M147.
With power and ground supplied, the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the LH turn signal lamps.
RH Turn NAEL0283S0102
When the turn signal switch is moved to the RH position, power is supplied from turn signal switch terminal
2 to
I front turn signal lamp RH terminal 3
I combination meter terminal 29
I rear combination lamp RH terminal 5.
Ground is supplied to the front turn signal lamp RH terminal 1 through body grounds E13 and E41.
Ground is supplied to the rear combination lamp RH terminal 6 through body grounds B55 and B75.
Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 30 through body grounds M4, M66 and M147.
With power and ground supplied, the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the RH turn signal lamps.
HAZARD LAMP OPERATION NAEL0283S02
Power is supplied at all times to hazard switch terminal 3 through:
I 15A fuse [No. 20, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
With the hazard switch in the ON position, power is supplied
I through terminal 1 of the hazard switch
I to combination flasher unit terminal 1
I through terminal 3 of the combination flasher unit
I to hazard switch terminal 4.
Ground is supplied to combination flasher unit terminal 2 through body grounds M4, M66 and M147.
Power is supplied through terminal 5 of the hazard switch to
I front turn signal lamp LH terminal 3
I combination meter terminal 25
I rear combination lamp LH terminal 5.
Power is supplied through terminal 6 of the hazard switch to
I front turn signal lamp RH terminal 3
I combination meter terminal 29
I rear combination lamp RH terminal 5.

EL-78
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
System Description (Cont’d)
Ground is supplied to terminal 1 of each front turn signal lamp through body grounds E13 and E41. GI
Ground is supplied to terminal 6 of the rear combination lamp LH through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
Ground is supplied to terminal 6 of the rear combination lamp RH through body grounds B55 and B75.
Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 30 through body grounds M4, M66 and M147. MA
With power and ground supplied, the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the hazard warning
lamps.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION EM
NAEL0283S03
Power is supplied at all times
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 49 LC
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Ground is supplied to smart entrance control unit terminal 43 and 64.
Refer to “REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM”, EL-310. EC
When smart entrance control unit receives LOCK or UNLOCK signal from keyfob with all doors closed, power
is supplied
FE
I through terminal 47 of smart entrance control unit
I to front turn signal lamp LH terminal 3
I to combination meter terminal 25 CL
I to rear combination lamp LH terminal 5, and
I through terminal 48 of smart entrance control unit
MT
I to front turn signal lamp RH terminal 3
I to combination meter terminal 29
I to rear combination lamp RH terminal 5. AT
Ground is supplied to terminal 1 of each front turn signal lamp through body grounds E13 and E41.
Ground is supplied to terminal 6 of the rear combination lamp LH through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
Ground is supplied to terminal 6 of the rear combination lamp RH through body grounds B55 and B75. TF
Ground is supplied to combination meter terminal 30 through body grounds M4, M66 and M147.
With power and ground supplied, the smart entrance control unit controls the flashing of the hazard warning
lamps. PD

IDX

EL-79
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TURN —

Wiring Diagram — TURN — NAEL0284

MEL861N

EL-80
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — TURN — (Cont’d)

MEL862N

IDX

EL-81
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NAEL0285

Symptom Possible cause Repair order

Turn signal and hazard warning 1. Hazard switch 1. Check hazard switch.
lamps do not operate. 2. Combination flasher unit 2. Refer to combination flasher unit check.
3. Open in combination flasher 3. Check wiring to combination flasher unit for open
unit circuit circuit.

Turn signal lamps do not operate 1. 7.5A fuse 1. Check 7.5A fuse [No. 12, located in fuse block
but hazard warning lamps operate. 2. Hazard switch (J/B)]. Turn ignition switch ON and verify battery
3. Combination switch (turn signal) positive voltage is present at terminal 2 of hazard
4. Open in combination switch switch.
(turn signal) circuit 2. Check hazard switch.
3. Check combination switch (turn signal).
4. Check the wire between combination flasher unit
terminal 3 and combination switch (turn signal) ter-
minal 1 for open circuit.

Hazard warning lamps do not oper- 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse [No. 20, located in fuse block (J/B)].
ate but turn signal lamps operate. 2. Hazard switch Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
3. Open in hazard switch circuit 3 of hazard switch.
2. Check hazard switch.
3. Check the wire between combination flasher unit
terminal 3 and hazard switch terminal 4 for open cir-
cuit.

Front turn signal lamp LH or RH 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

does not operate. 2. Grounds E13 and E41 2. Check grounds E13 and E41.
3. Open in front turn signal lamp 3. Check harness between front turn signal lamp and
circuit combination switch.

Rear combination lamp LH does 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

not operate. 2. Grounds B11, B22 and D210 2. Check grounds B11, B22 and D210.
3. Open in rear combination lamp 3. Check harness between rear combination lamp LH
LH circuit and hazard switch.

Rear combination lamp RH does 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb.

not operate. 2. Grounds B55 and B75 2. Check grounds B55 and B75.
3. Open in rear combination lamp 3. Check harness between rear combination lamp RH
RH circuit and hazard switch.

LH and RH turn indicators do not 1. Ground 1. Check grounds M4, M66 and M147.
operate.

LH or RH turn indicator does not 1. Bulb 1. Check bulb in combination meter.

operate. 2. Open in turn indicator circuit 2. Check harness between combination meter and haz-
ard switch.

Electrical Components Inspection NAEL0286

COMBINATION FLASHER UNIT CHECK NAEL0286S01
I Before checking, ensure that bulbs meet specifications.
I Connect a battery and test lamp to the combination flasher
unit, as shown. Combination flasher unit is properly function-
ing if it blinks when power is supplied to the circuit.

SEL122E

EL-82
ILLUMINATION
System Description

System Description NAEL0287

GI
The illumination lamp operation is controlled by the lighting switch which is built into the combination switch
and smart entrance control unit. The battery saver system is controlled by smart entrance control unit.
Power is supplied at all times MA
I to tail lamp relay terminals 1 and 3
I through 10A fuse (No. 61, located in the fuse and fusible link box), and EM
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 49
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When ignition switch is in ON or START position, power is supplied LC
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 27
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)], and EC
When the ignition switch is in ACC or ON position, power is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 26
I through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. FE
Ground is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64 CL
I through body grounds M77 and M111.
LIGHTING OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH NAEL0287S01 MT
When lighting switch is 1ST (or 2ND) position, ground is supplied
I to tail lamp relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57
I through smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58, and AT
I through lighting switch and body grounds E13 and E41.
Tail lamp relay is then energized and illumination lamps illuminate. TF
The lighting switch must be in the 1ST or 2ND position for illumination.
The illumination control switch that controls the amount of current to the illumination system. As the amount
of current increases, the illumination becomes brighter. PD
The ground for all of the components except for grove box lamp, ashtray and compass and thermometer are
controlled through terminals 2 and 3 of the illumination control switch and body grounds M77 and M111.
LIGHTING OPERATION BY AUTO LIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
AX
NAEL0287S02
When auto light operation is operated, ground is supplied
I to tail lamp relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57 SU
I through smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64, and
I to body grounds M77 and M111.
BR
Tail lamp relay is then energized and the illumination lamps illuminate.
The illumination control switch that controls the amount of current to the illumination system. As the amount
of current increases, the illumination becomes brighter. ST
The following chart shows the power and ground connector terminals for the components included in the illu-
mination system.
Component Connector No. Power terminal Ground terminal RS
Illumination control switch M19 1 3

4WD shift switch M141 7 8

BT
Ashtray B76 1 2
HA
A/T indicator B59 3 4

Cigarette lighter M57 3 4

SC
Audio unit M48 8 7

Compass and thermometer R4 5 2

Hazard switch M35 7 8

Rear window defogger switch M36 5 6

IDX

EL-83
ILLUMINATION
System Description (Cont’d)

Component Connector No. Power terminal Ground terminal

CD player M92, M93 3 5

CD auto changer M125 2 9

A/C switch illumination M45 2 1

Power window main switch D6 16 18

Front power window switch RH D36 10 17

Display & NAVI control unit M117, M118 8 24

A/C auto amp. M102 24 25

Clock M40 3 4

Globe box lamp M30 1 2

The ground for all of the components except for compass and thermometer, glove box lamp and ashtray are
controlled through terminals 2 and 3 of the illumination control switch and body grounds M77 and M111.
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL NAEL0287S03
Except for Auto Light Control Operation NAEL0287S0301
Illumination lamps will remain on for a short while after the ignition switch is turned from ON (or ACC) to OFF.
Continuity between terminals 19 and 20, and between terminals 57 and 58 of smart entrance control unit will
be disturbed after 5 minutes, then the illumination lamp will be turned off.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 1ST (or 2ND) after illumination lamps are turned off by the
battery saver control, ground is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and
I to tail lamp relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 19 and 57.
Then illumination lamps illuminate again.
Auto light control operation NAEL0287S0302
While the illumination lamps are turned ON by “AUTO” operation, the exterior lamp battery saver is activated
for 5 minutes when the ignition switch is turned from ON (or ACC) to OFF, and either LH or RH front door
switch is opened.
The smart entrance control unit controls exterior lamp battery saver activation as follows:
I When the door switch signal changes from ON to OFF while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated,
the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the illumination lamps will be turned
off.
I When the door switch signal changes from OFF to ON while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated,
the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the illumination lamps will be turned
off.
I When the one of four door switch signals changes from OFF to ON while the exterior lamp battery saver
is activated, the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 5 minutes seconds, then the illumination
lamps will be turned off.
I When all the door switch ON signals are input while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated, the
operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the illumination lamps will be turned off.
I Exterior battery saver control time can be changed using “WORK SUPPORT” mode in “HEADLAMP”.
When the lighting switch is turned from OFF to 2ND after illumination lamps are turned to off by the exterior
lamp battery saver control, ground is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminals 20 and 58 from lighting switch terminal 11, and then,
I to tail lamp relays terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59,
I through smart entrance control unit terminals 22 and 60 and
I through lighting switch terminal 12.
Then illumination lamps illuminate again.
NOTE:
For Trouble Diagnoses for battery saver control, refer to “PARKING, LICENSE AND TAIL LAMPS”
(EL-69).

EL-84
ILLUMINATION
Schematic

Schematic NAEL0288
GI

MEL399P
IDX

EL-85
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL —

Wiring Diagram — ILL — NAEL0289

MEL400P

EL-86
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL — (Cont’d)

MEL405P

IDX

EL-87
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL — (Cont’d)

MEL427O

EL-88
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL — (Cont’d)

MEL401P

IDX

EL-89
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL — (Cont’d)

MEL402P

EL-90
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram — ILL — (Cont’d)

MEL406P

IDX

EL-91
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
System Description

System Description NAEL0290

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND NAEL0290S01
Power is supplied at all times:
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to key switch terminal 2 and
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 49.
When the key is removed from ignition key cylinder, power is interrupted:
I through key switch terminal 1
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 25.
With the ignition key switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied:
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 27.
Ground is supplied:
I to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64
I through body grounds terminals M77 and M111.
When the front driver side door is opened, ground is supplied:
I through body grounds B11, B22 and D210
I to front door switch (LH) terminal 2
I from front door switch (LH) terminal 1
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 1.
When the front passenger side door is opened, ground is supplied:
I through body grounds terminals B55 and B75
I to front door switch (RH) terminal 2
I from front door switch (RH) terminal 1
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 2.
When any other door (except front door) is opened, ground is supplied to smart entrance control unit termi-
nal 3 in the same manner as the front door switch.
When the front driver side door is unlocked by the central switch, the smart entrance control unit receives a
ground signal:
I through body grounds terminals M77 and M111 (LH) or M4, M66 and M147 (RH)
I to door lock and unlock switch terminal 5 (LH) or 7 (RH)
I from door lock and unlock switch terminal 19 (LH) or 18 (RH)
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 4.
When the front LH door is unlocked by the front door key cylinder switch and back door key cylinder switch,
the smart entrance control unit receives a ground signal:
I through body grounds terminals M77 and M111
I to front door key cylinder switch LH terminal 2
I from front door key cylinder switch LH terminal 1
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 10, and
I through body grounds terminals B11, B22 and D210
I to back door key cylinder switch terminal 4
I from back door key cylinder switch terminal 2
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 10.
When a signal, or combination of signals is received by the smart entrance control unit, ground is supplied:
I through smart entrance control unit terminal 31
I to interior lamp terminal 2.
With power and ground supplied, the interior lamp illuminates.
SWITCH OPERATION NAEL0290S02
When interior lamp switch is ON, ground is supplied:
I through case grounds of interior lamp
I to interior lamp.

EL-92
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
System Description (Cont’d)
And power is supplied: GI
I to interior lamp terminal 1
I from smart entrance control unit terminal 50.
When spot lamp (LH and/or RH) is ON, ground is supplied: MA
I through body grounds M4, M66 and M147
I to spot lamp terminal 2. EM
And power is supplied:
I to spot lamp terminal 1
I from smart entrance control unit terminal 50.
LC
When vanity mirror illumination (LH and/or RH) is ON, ground is supplied:
I through body grounds M4, M66 and M147 EC
I to vanity mirror illuminations (LH and RH) terminals 2.
And power is supplied:
FE
I to vanity mirror illuminations (LH and RH) terminals 1
I from smart entrance control unit terminal 50.
With power and ground supplied, interior lamps turn ON. CL
INTERIOR LAMP TIMER OPERATION NAEL0290S03
When interior lamp switch is in the “DOOR” position, the smart entrance control unit keeps the interior lamp MT
illuminated for about 30 seconds when:
I unlock signal is supplied from door lock and unlock switch while all doors are closed and key is out of
ignition key cylinder AT
I unlock signal is supplied from keyfob or door key cylinder while driver’s door is locked and all doors are
closed
TF
I key is removed from ignition key cylinder while all doors are closed
I driver’s door is opened and then closed while key is out of the iginition key cylinder. (However, if the driv-
er’s door is closed with the key inserted in the ignition key cylinder after the driver’s door is opened with PD
the key removed, the timer is operated.)
The timer is canceled when:
I driver’s door is locked, AX
I driver’s door is opened, or
I ignition switch is turned ON. SU
When driver’s door is locked, interior room lamp timer is canceled as described before.
ON-OFF CONTROL NAEL0290S04 BR
When the driver side door, front passenger door, rear LH or RH door is opened, the interior room lamp turns
on while the interior room lamp switch is in the “DOOR” position.
INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER
ST
NAEL0290S05
The lamp turns off automatically when interior lamp, luggage room lamp, spot lamp and/or vanity mirror illu-
mination is illuminated with the ignition key is in OFF position, if the lamp remains lit by the door switch open RS
signal or if the lamp switch is in ON position for more than 30 minutes.
After lamps turn OFF by the battery saver system, the lamps illuminate again when:
I driver’s door is locked or unlocked, BT
I door is opened or closed,
I key is removed from ignition key cylinder or inserted in ignition key cylinder
HA

IDX

EL-93
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Schematic

Schematic NAEL0291

MEL407P

EL-94
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — INT/L —

Wiring Diagram — INT/L — NAEL0292

MEL408P
IDX

EL-95
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — INT/L — (Cont’d)

MEL713N

EL-96
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — INT/L — (Cont’d)

MEL476O

IDX

EL-97
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — INT/L — (Cont’d)

MEL409P

EL-98
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — INT/L — (Cont’d)

MEL410P

IDX

EL-99
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure

CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure =NAEL0293

“INT LAMP”/“BATTERY SAVER” NAEL0293S01
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to the data link connector.

SEL331X

3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

4. Touch “START”.

PBR455D

5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.

SEL398Y

6. Touch “INT LAMP” or “BATTERY SAVER”.

SEL399Y

7. Select diagnosis mode.

“DATA MONITOR” and “ACTIVE TEST” are available for “INT
LAMP” and “BATTERY SAVER”.

SEL400Y

EL-100
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
CONSULT-II Application Items

CONSULT-II Application Items NAEL0294

GI
“INT LAMP” NAEL0294S01
Data Monitor NAEL0294S0101 MA
Monitored Item Description

IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. EM

DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.

KEY ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch. LC

DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.

DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH. EC

LOCK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door lock switch.

UNLK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door lock switch.

FE
KEY CYL LK-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door key cylinder switch.
CL
KEY CYL UN-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door key cylinder switch.

LK BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.

MT
UN BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.

Active Test NAEL0294S0102

AT
Test Item Description

INT LAMP This test enables to check interior lamp operation. TF

When “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched:
I Interior lamp turns on when the switch is at DOOR.
(Smart entrance control unit supplies power and ground to interior lamp.) PD
IGN ILLUM This test enables to check ignition key hole illumination operation. The illumination turns on when
“ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
AX
STEP LAMP This test enables to check step lamp operation.
The illumination turns on when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
SU
NOTE:
Even though ignition key hole illumination and step lamp are actually displayed on the CONSULT-II screen,
those are not equipped, therefore, they cannot be activated. BR
Work Support NAEL0294S0103

Work Item Description

ST
Interior lamp timer mode can be changed by mode setting. Selects ON-OFF of the room lamp
illumination at the time the driver door is unlocked. RS
ROOM LAMP TIMER SET NOTE:
Even though ignition keyhole illumination and step lamp are actually displayed on the CON-
SULT-II screen, those are not equipped, therefore, they cannot be activated. BT
“BATTERY SAVER” NAEL0294S02
Data Monitor HA
NAEL0294S0201

Monitored Item Description

SC
IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.

DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.

KEY ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.

DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.

IDX

EL-101
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
CONSULT-II Application Items (Cont’d)

Monitored Item Description

DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.

LOCK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door lock switch.

UNLK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door lock switch.

KEY CYL LK-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door key cylinder switch.

KEY CYL UN-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door key cylinder switch.

LK BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.

UN BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.

Active Test NAEL0294S0202

Test Item Description

BATTERY SAVER This test enables to check interior lamp and spot lamp and vanity mirror illuminations opera-
tions.
When touch “ON” on CONSULT-II screen.
I Interior lamp turns on when the switch is in ON.
(Smart entrance control unit supplies power to interior lamp.)
I Spot lamp and vanity mirror illuminations turn on when the switch is in ON.
(Smart entrance control unit supplies power to spot lamp, and vanity mirror illuminations.)

Work Support NAEL0294S0203

Work Item Description

Interior lamp battery saver control period can be changed by mode setting. Selects interior lamp
ROOM LAMP BAT SAV SET battery saver control period between two modes.
I MODE 1 (30 minutes)/MODE 2 (60 minutes)

EL-102
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer

Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer =NAEL0295

GI
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 NAEL0295S01
SYMPTOM: Interior lamp timer does not operate.
MA
1 CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check ignition switch ON signal (“IGN ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
EM

SEL318W
CL
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 27 (W/G) and ground. MT

SEL003Y
AX
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
SU
NG © Check the following.
I 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse BR

IDX

EL-103
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)

2 CHECK FRONT LH DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check driver door switch signal (“DOOR SW-DR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

SEL319WA

Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminal 1 (G/R) and ground.

SEL004Y

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

3 CHECK FRONT LH DOOR SWITCH

Check the following.
I Continuity between front LH door switch connector B9 terminals 1 and 2
I Continuity between front LH door switch B9 terminal 3 and ground

SEL277Y

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Front LH door switch ground circuit and condition
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and front LH door
switch
NG © Replace front LH door switch.

EL-104
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)

4 CHECK FRONT RH DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL GI

With CONSULT-II
Check driver door switch signal (“DOOR SW-AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. MA

SEL153Y
FE
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminal 2 (Y) and ground.
CL

TF
SEL152Y

OK or NG PD
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5. AX

5 CHECK FRONT RH DOOR SWITCH SU

Check the following.
I Continuity between front RH door switch connector B68 terminals 1 and 2
I Continuity between front RH door switch connector B68 terminal 3 and ground BR

SEL278Y HA
OK or NG
OK © Check the following. SC
I Front RH door switch ground circuit and condition
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and front RH door
switch
NG © Replace front RH door switch.

IDX

EL-105
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)

6 CHECK REAR AND BACK DOOR SWITCHES INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check door switches (“DOOR SW-RR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

SEL154YA

Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminal 3 (R/L) and ground.

SEL155Y

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © GO TO 7.

7 CHECK REAR AND BACK DOOR SWITCHES

1. Disconnect door switch harness connector.
2. Check the following.
I Continuity between rear door switches connector B18 and B71 terminal 1 and ground
I Continuity between back door switch connector D208 terminals 1 and 2

SEL279Y

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Rear LH, RH and/or back door switch ground circuit or door switch ground condition
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and rear LH, RH and/or
back door switch
NG © Replace rear LH, RH and/or back door switch.

EL-106
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)

8 CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL GI

With CONSULT-II
Check key switch (“KEY ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. MA

SEL315W
FE
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 25 (W/R) and ground.
CL

TF
SEL011Y

OK or NG PD
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © GO TO 9. AX

9 CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT) SU

Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2.

BT
SEL308X

OK or NG HA
OK © Check the following.
I 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse SC
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key switch
NG © Replace key switch.

IDX

EL-107
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)

10 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check door lock/unlock switch (“LOCK SW DR/AS”/“UNLK SW DR/AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

SEL341W

Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector .
2. Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminal 4 (LG/R) or 5 (BR) and ground.

SEL157Y

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 12.
NG © GO TO 11.

EL-108
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)

11 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH GI

1. Disconnect door lock/unlock switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between each door lock/unlock switch terminals. MA
I Power window main switch (Door lock/unlock switch connector)

SEL310X
FE
I Door lock/unlock switch RH connector

TF
SEL311X

OK or NG PD
OK © Check the following.
I Ground circuit for door lock/unlock switch
I Harness for open or short between door lock/unlock switch and smart entrance control AX
unit connector
NG © Replace door lock/unlock switch.
SU

IDX

EL-109
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)

12 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL)

With CONSULT-II
Check front door key cylinder switch (“KEY CYL LK-SW”/“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.

SEL342W

Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminals 10 (LG) or 11 (Y) and ground.

SEL280Y

OK or NG
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG © GO TO 13.

EL-110
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)

13 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH GI

1. Disconnect door key cylinder switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between each key cylinder switch terminals. MA
I Front door key cylinder switch harness connector D9

SEL187YA
FE
I Back door key cylinder switch harness connector D201

TF
SEL315X

OK or NG PD
OK © Check the following.
I Front or back door key cylinder switch ground circuit
I Harness for open or short between front or back door key cylinder switch and smart AX
entrance control unit connector
NG © Replace front or back door key cylinder switch.
SU

IDX

EL-111
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 NAEL0295S02
SYMPTOM: Interior lamp timer does not cancel properly.
1 CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Check ignition switch ON signal (“IGN ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

SEL318W

Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 27 (W/B) and ground.

SEL995X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check the following.
I 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse

EL-112
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)

2 CHECK FRONT LH DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL GI

With CONSULT-II
Check driver door switch signal (“DOOR SW-DR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. MA

SEL319WA
FE
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminal 1 (G/R) and ground.
CL

TF
SEL004Y

OK or NG PD
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3. AX

3 CHECK FRONT LH DOOR SWITCH SU

Check continuity between door switch connector B9 terminals 1 and 2.

BT
SEL277Y

OK or NG HA
OK © Check the following.
I Front LH door switch ground circuit and condition
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and front LH door SC
switch
NG © Replace front LH door switch.

IDX

EL-113
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)

4 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check door lock/unlock switch (“LOCK SW DR/AS”/“UNLK SW DR/AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

SEL341W

Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector .
2. Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminal 4 (LG/R) or 5 (BR) and ground.

SEL157Y

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 5.

EL-114
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)

5 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH GI

1. Disconnect door lock/unlock switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between each door lock/unlock switch terminals. MA
I Power window main switch (Door lock/unlock switch connector)

SEL310X
FE
I Door lock/unlock switch RH connector

TF
SEL311X

IDX

EL-115
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)

6 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL)

With CONSULT-II
Check front door key cylinder switch (“KEY CYL LK-SW”/“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.

SEL342W

Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminals 10 (LG) or 11 (Y) and ground.

SEL280Y

OK or NG
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG © GO TO 7.

EL-116
INTERIOR, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND LUGGAGE ROOM LAMPS
Trouble Diagnoses for Interior Lamp Timer (Cont’d)

7 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH GI

1. Disconnect door key cylinder switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between each key cylinder switch terminals. MA
I Front door key cylinder switch harness connector D9

SEL187YA
FE
I Back door key cylinder switch harness connector D201

TF
SEL315X

IDX

EL-117
METERS AND GAUGES
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location

Component Parts and Harness Connector

Location NAEL0296

SEL486Y

System Description NAEL0297

UNIFIED CONTROL METER NAEL0297S01
I Speedometer, odo/trip meter, tachometer, fuel gauge and water temperature gauge are controlled totally
by control unit.
I Digital meter is adopted for odo/trip meter.*
*The record of the odo meter is kept even if the battery cable is disconnected. The record of the trip meter
is erased when the battery cable is disconnected.
I Odo/trip meter segment can be checked in diagnosis mode.
I Meter/gauge can be checked in diagnosis mode.
HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/TRIP METER NAEL0297S02

SEL175W

NOTE:
Turn ignition switch to the “ON” position to operate odo/trip meter.

EL-118
METERS AND GAUGES
System Description (Cont’d)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT NAEL0297S03
GI
Power is supplied at all times
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to combination meter terminal 62. MA
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
I through 10A fuse [No. 8, located in the fuse block (J/B)] EM
I to combination meter terminal 66.
Ground is supplied
LC
I to combination meter terminal 59
I through body grounds M4, M66 and M147.
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE EC
NAEL0297S04
The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The reading on the gauge is based
on the resistance of the thermal transmitter. FE
As the temperature of the coolant increases, the resistance of the thermal transmitter decreases. A variable
ground is supplied to terminal 18 of the combination meter for the water temperature gauge. The needle on
the gauge moves from “C” to “H”. CL
TACHOMETER NAEL0297S05
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). MT
The tachometer is regulated by a signal
I from terminal 25 of the ECM
I to combination meter terminal 16 for the tachometer. AT
FUEL GAUGE NAEL0297S06
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank. TF
The fuel gauge is regulated by a variable ground signal supplied
I to combination meter terminal 17 for the fuel gauge
I from terminal 3 of the fuel level sensor unit PD
I through terminal 2 of the fuel level sensor unit and
I through body grounds B11, B22 and D210. AX
SPEEDOMETER NAEL0297S07
The ABS actuator and electric unit provides a voltage signal to the combination meter for the speedometer.
The voltage is supplied
SU
I from combination meter terminal 15 for the speedometer
I to terminal 19 of the ABS actuator and electric unit. BR
The speedometer converts the voltage into the vehicle speed displayed.
ST

IDX

EL-119
METERS AND GAUGES
Combination Meter

Combination Meter NAEL0298

CHECK NAEL0298S01

MEL915O

EL-120
METERS AND GAUGES
Combination Meter (Cont’d)
CONSTRUCTION NAEL0298S02
GI

SEL482Y MT

IDX

EL-121
METERS AND GAUGES
Schematic

Schematic NAEL0299

MEL411P

EL-122
METERS AND GAUGES
Wiring Diagram — METER —

Wiring Diagram — METER — NAEL0300

MEL412P
IDX

EL-123
METERS AND GAUGES
Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode

Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter

Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode NAEL0301
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION NAEL0301S01
I Odo/trip meter segment can be checked in diagnosis mode.
I Meters/gauges can be checked in diagnosis mode.
HOW TO ALTERNATE DIAGNOSIS MODE NAEL0301S02
1. Turn ignition switch to ON and change odo/trip meter to “TRIP
A” or “TRIP B”.
2. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
3. Turn ignition switch to ON when pushing odo/trip meter switch.
4. Push odo/trip meter switch 1 second.
5. Release odo/trip meter switch.
6. Push odo/trip meter switch more than three times within 7
seconds.

7. All odo/trip meter segments should be turned on.

NOTE:
If some segments are not turned on, unified meter control unit with
odo/trip meter should be replaced.
At this point, the unified control meter is turned to diagnosis
mode.

SEL176W

8. Push odo/trip meter switch. Indication of each meter/gauge

should be as shown left during pushing odo/trip meter switch
if it is no malfunctioning.
NOTE:
It takes about a few seconds for indication of fuel gauge and water
temperature gauge to become stable.

SEL177W

EL-124
METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NAEL0302

GI
PRELIMINARY CHECK NAEL0302S01

PD
SEL494Y

*1: Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/ *2: POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND *3: Symptom Chart 1 (EL-125) AX
Trip Meter Segment Check in CIRCUIT CHECK (EL-126)
Diagnosis Mode (EL-124)
SU
SYMPTOM CHART NAEL0302S02
BR
Symptom Possible causes Repair order

One of speedometer/ 1. Sensor signal 1. Check the sensor for malfunctioning meter/gauge.
tachometer/fuel gauge/ - Vehicle speed signal INSPECTION/VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL (Refer to ST
water temp. gauge is mal- - Engine revolution signal EL-127.)
functioning. - Fuel gauge INSPECTION/ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL
- Water temp. gauge (Refer to EL-128.) RS
2. Unified meter control unit INSPECTION/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT (Refer to
EL-129.)
Multiple meter/gauge are Unified meter control unit
malfunctioning. (except
INSPECTION/THERMAL TRANSMITTER (Refer to BT
EL-130.)
odo/trip meter) 2. Replace unified meter control unit assembly.
HA
Before starting trouble diagnoses below, perform PRELIMINARY
CHECK, EL-125.
SC

IDX

EL-125
METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK =NAEL0302S03
Power Supply Circuit Check NAEL0302S0301

Terminals Ignition switch position

(+) (−) OFF ACC ON

Battery Battery Battery

62 Ground
voltage voltage voltage

Battery
66 Ground 0V 0V
voltage
SEL179WB
If NG, check the following.
I 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I 10A fuse [No. 8, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between fuse and combination
meter

Ground Circuit Check NAEL0302S0302

Terminals

(+)
Continuity
Terminal (−)
Connector
(wire color)

59 (B)
M26 Ground Yes
63 (SB)

SEL057Y

EL-126
METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
INSPECTION/VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL =NAEL0302S04
GI
1 CHECK ABS CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II MA
1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine and drive vehicle at more than 20 km/h (12 MPH).
3. Check signal between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 15 (G/Y) and ground when rotating wheels EM
with engine at idle. (Use “SIMPLE OSCILLOSCOPE” in “SUB MODE” with CONSULT-II.)

CL
SEL938W

Without CONSULT-II MT
1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine and drive vehicle at more than 20 km/h (12 MPH).
3. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M24 terminal 15 (G/Y) and ground when rotating wheels AT
with engine at idle.

SU
SEL939WA

OK or NG
BR
OK © ABS control unit is OK.
NG © Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between ABS actuator and electric unit and combination ST
meter.
I ABS actuator and electric unit. Refer to BR-59, “Wheel Sensor or Rotor”.
RS

IDX

EL-127
METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
INSPECTION/ENGINE REVOLUTION SIGNAL NAEL0302S05

1 CHECK ECM OUTPUT

1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between combination meter terminals 16 and ground at idle and 2,000 rpm.

SEL364WB

OK or NG
OK © Engine revolution signal is OK.
NG © Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter

EL-128
METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
INSPECTION/FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT =NAEL0302S06
GI
1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT
Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit terminal 2 and ground. MA

SEL299X FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2. CL
NG © Repair harness or connector.

MT
2 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT
Refer to “FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK” (EL-131).
AT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace fuel level sensor unit.
TF

3 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN OR SHORT PD

1. Disconnect combination meter connector and fuel level sensor unit connector.
2. Check continuity between combination meter terminal 17 and fuel level sensor unit terminal 3. AX
3. Check continuity between combination meter terminal 17 and ground.

SEL300X
RS
OK or NG
OK © Fuel level sensor unit is OK. BT
NG © Repair harness or connector.
HA

IDX

EL-129
METERS AND GAUGES
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
INSPECTION/THERMAL TRANSMITTER =NAEL0302S07

1 CHECK THERMAL TRANSMITTER

Refer to “THERMAL TRANSMITTER CHECK” (EL-131).
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace.

2 CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN OR SHORT

1. Disconnect combination meter connector and thermal transmitter connector.
2. Check continuity between combination meter terminal 18 and thermal transmitter terminal 1.
Continuity should exist.
3. Check continuity between combination meter terminal 18 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.

SEL184WA

OK or NG
OK © Thermal transmitter is OK.
NG © Repair harness or connector.

EL-130
METERS AND GAUGES
Electrical Components Inspection

Electrical Components Inspection =NAEL0303

GI
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK NAEL0303S02
I For removal, refer to FE-4, “FUEL SYSTEM”.
MA
Check the resistance between terminals 3 and 2.
Ohmmeter Resistance
Float position mm (in) EM
(+) (−) value Ω

*1 Full 95 (3.74) Approx. 4 - 6

LC
3 2 *2 1/2 184 (7.24) 31 - 34
YEL066K
*3 Empty 265 (10.43) 80 - 83 EC
*1 and *3: When float rod is in contact with stopper.

AT
THERMAL TRANSMITTER CHECK NAEL0303S03
Check the resistance between the terminals of thermal transmitter
and body ground. TF
Water temperature Resistance

60°C (140°F) Approx. 170 - 210Ω PD

100°C (212°F) Approx. 47 - 53Ω
AX

MEL424F SU

IDX

EL-131
COMPASS AND THERMOMETER
System Description

System Description NAEL0304

SEL713U

This unit displays following items:

I Earth magnetism and heading direction of vehicle.
I Outside air temperature.
I Caution for frozen road surfaces.
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY NAEL0304S01
Push the switch when the ignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. The outside temperature will be dis-
played in “°F”.
I Selecting the indication range
Push the switch to change from “°F” to “°C”.
I When the outside temperature drops below freezing point, ICE is displayed on the unit.
I When the outside temperature is between 55°C (130°F) and 70°C (158°F), the display shows 55°C
(130°F).
I When the outside temperature is lower than −30°C (−20°F) or higher than 70°C (158°F), the display shows
only “---” though it is operating. This is not a problem.
I The indicated temperature on the thermometer is not readily affected by engine heat. It changes only when
one of the following conditions is present.
a) The temperature detected by the ambient air temperature sensor is lower than the indicated temperature
on the thermometer.
b) The difference in temperature detected during a period of 40 seconds is less than 1°C (1.8°F) when vehicle
speed has been greater than 24 km/h (15 MPH) for more than 100 seconds.
(This is to prevent the indicated temperature from being affected by engine heat or cooling fan operation
during low-speed driving.)
c) The ignition key has been turned to the “OFF” position for more than 4 hours. (The engine is cold.)
DIRECTION DISPLAY NAEL0304S02
Push the switch when the ignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. The direction will be displayed.

EL-132
COMPASS AND THERMOMETER
Wiring Diagram — COMPAS —

Wiring Diagram — COMPAS — NAEL0305

MEL346N
IDX

EL-133
COMPASS AND THERMOMETER
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NAEL0306

PRELIMINARY CHECK FOR THERMOMETER NAEL0306S01

1 COOL DOWN CHECK

1. Turn the ignition key switch to the “ACC” position.
2. Cool down the ambient air temperature sensor with water or ice, so that the indicated temperature falls.
Does the indicated temperature fall?
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © The system is malfunctioning. Check the system following “INSPECTION/COMPASS
AND THERMOMETER”.

2 WARM UP CHECK
1. Leave the vehicle for 10 minutes, so that the indicated temperature rises.
2. With the ignition key in the “ACC” position, disconnect and reconnect the ambient air temperature sensor connector.
Does the indicated temperature rise?
Yes © The system is OK.
No © The system is malfunctioning. Check the system following “INSPECTION/COMPASS
AND THERMOMETER”.

NOTE:
I When the outside temperature is between 55°C (130°F) and 70°C (158°F), the display shows 55°C
(130°F). When the outside temperature is lower than −30°C (−20°F) or higher than 70°C (158°F), the dis-
play shows only “---”.
I The indicated temperature on the thermometer is not readily affected by engine heat. It changes only when
one of the following conditions is present.
a) The temperature detected by the ambient air temperature sensor is lower than the indicated temperature
on the thermometer.
b) The difference in temperature detected during a period of 40 seconds is less than 1°C (1.8°F) when vehicle
speed has been greater than 24 km/h (15 MPH) for more than 100 seconds.
(This is to prevent the indicated temperature from being affected by engine heat or cooling fan operation
during low-speed driving.)
c) The ignition key has been turned to the “OFF” position for more than 4 hours. (The engine is cold.)
INSPECTION/COMPASS AND THERMOMETER NAEL0306S02

Symptom Possible causes Repair order

No display at all 1. 10A fuse 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 9, located in fuse block (J/B)].
2. Ground circuit Turn the ignition switch ON and verify that battery positive
3. Compass and thermometer voltage is at terminal 7 of compass and thermometer.
2. Check ground circuit for compass and thermometer.
3. Replace compass and thermometer.

Forward direction indi- 1. In manual correction mode (Bar 1. Drive the vehicle and turn at an angle of 90°.
cation slips off the and display vanish.) 2. Perform the zone variation change.
mark or incorrect. 2. Zone variation change is not done.

Compass reading 1. Vehicle speed signal is not entered. 1. Check harness for open or short between combination meter
remains unchanged. 2. Compass and thermometer terminal 13 and compass and thermometer terminal 1.
2. Replace compass and thermometer.

Displays wrong tem- 1. Check operation 1. Perform preliminary check shown above.
perature when ambient 2. Ambient air temperature sensor 2. Check harness for open or short between ambient air tem-
temperature is between circuit perature sensor and compass and thermometer.
−30°C (−20°F) and 3. Vehicle speed signal is not entered. 3. Check harness for open or short between combination meter
55°C (130°F). (See 4. Ambient air temperature sensor terminal 13 and compass and thermometer terminal 1.
NOTE above.) 5. Compass and thermometer 4. Replace ambient air temperature sensor.
5. Replace compass and thermometer.

EL-134
COMPASS AND THERMOMETER
Calibration Procedure for Compass

Calibration Procedure for Compass =NAEL0307

GI
The difference between magnetic North and geographical North
can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings.
In order for the compass to operate accurately in a particular zone, MA
it must be calibrated using the following procedure.
EM

AX
SEL738UA

SU
CORRECTION FUNCTIONS OF COMPASS NAEL0307S01
The direction display is equipped with automatic correction func-
tion. If the direction is not shown correctly, carry out initial correc-
BR
tion.
INITIAL CORRECTION PROCEDURE FOR COMPASS ST
NAEL0307S02
1. Pushing the “Mode” switch for about 10 seconds will enter the
initial correction mode. The direction bar starts blinking.
RS
2. Turn the vehicle slowly in an open, safe place. The initial cor-
rection is completed in one or two turns.
SEL065V
NOTE: BT
In places where the terrestrial magnetism is extremely disturbed,
the initial correction may start automatically.
HA

IDX

EL-135
WARNING LAMPS
Schematic

Schematic NAEL0308

MEL431O

EL-136
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN —

Wiring Diagram — WARN — NAEL0309

MEL413P
IDX

EL-137
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN — (Cont’d)

MEL414P

EL-138
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN — (Cont’d)

MEL405O

IDX

EL-139
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN — (Cont’d)

MEL432O

EL-140
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN — (Cont’d)

MEL406O

IDX

EL-141
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN — (Cont’d)

MEL415P

EL-142
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN — (Cont’d)

MEL416P

IDX

EL-143
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram — WARN — (Cont’d)

MEL417P

EL-144
WARNING LAMPS
Fuel Warning Lamp Sensor Check

Fuel Warning Lamp Sensor Check NAEL0310

GI
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit harness connector B12.
3. Connect a resistor (80Ω) between fuel tank gauge unit harness
MA
connector terminals 2 and 3.
4. Turn ignition switch “ON”. EM
The fuel warning lamp should come on.
NOTE:
ECM might store the 1st trip DTC P0180 during this inspection. LC
SEL062WA
If the DTC is stored in ECM memory, erase the DTC after recon-
necting fuel tank gauge unit harness connector.
Refer to EC-73, “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAG- EC
NOSTIC INFORMATION”.
FE

AT
Electrical Components Inspection NAEL0311
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CHECK NAEL0311S01
TF
Oil pressure
Continuity
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
PD
More than 10 - 20
Engine start NO
(0.1 - 0.2, 1 - 3)

Less than 10 - 20 AX
Engine stop YES
(0.1 - 0.2, 1 - 3)

MEL425F Check the continuity between the terminals of oil pressure switch SU
and body ground.

BT
DIODE CHECK NAEL0311S02
I Check continuity using an ohmmeter. HA
I Diode is functioning properly if test results are as shown in the
figure at left.
I Check diodes at the combination meter harness connector SC
instead of checking them on the combination meter assembly.
Refer to EL-137, “WARNING LAMP” wiring diagrams.
NOTE:
Specification may vary depending on the type of tester. Before
performing this inspection, be sure to refer to the instruction IDX
SEL901F manual for the tester to be used.

EL-145
WARNING CHIME
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location

Component Parts and Harness Connector

Location NAEL0312

SEL046WA

System Description NAEL0313

The warning chime is controlled by the smart entrance control unit.
The warning chime is located in the smart entrance control unit.
Power is supplied at all times
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 49 and
I to key switch terminal 2,
I through 10A fuse (No. 61, located in the fuse and fusible link box
I to tail lamp relay terminals 1 and 3.
When the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 27.
Ground is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64
I through body grounds M77 and M111.
When a signal, or combination of signals, is received by the smart entrance control unit, the warning chime
will sound.
IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME NAEL0313S01
When the key in the ignition switch in the OFF position, and the driver’s door open, the warning chime will
sound. Power is supplied
I from key switch terminal 1
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 25.
Ground is supplied
I from front door switch (driver side) terminal 1
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 1.
Front door switch (driver side) terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
LIGHT WARNING CHIME NAEL0313S02
When ignition switch OFF, driver’s door open, and lighting switch in 1ST or 2ND position, warning chime will
sound. Power is supplied.
I from tail lamp relay terminal 2

EL-146
WARNING CHIME
System Description (Cont’d)
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 19 and 57. GI
Ground is supplied
I from front door switch (driver side) terminal 1
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 1. MA
Front door switch (driver side) terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME EM
NAEL0313S03
With ignition switch turned ON and seat belt unfastened (seat belt switch ON), warning chime will sound for
approximately 6 seconds. LC
Ground is supplied
I from seat belt switch terminal 1
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 28. EC
Seat belt switch terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
FE

IDX

EL-147
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram — CHIME —

Wiring Diagram — CHIME — NAEL0314

MEL554P

EL-148
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram — CHIME — (Cont’d)

MEL555P

IDX

EL-149
WARNING CHIME
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure

CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure =NAEL0315

“KEY WARN ALM”/“LIGHT WARN ALM”/“SEAT BELT
ALM” NAEL0315S01
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to the data link connector.

SEL331X

3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

4. Touch “START”.

PBR455D

5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.

SEL398Y

6. Touch “KEY WARN ALM”, “LIGHT WARN ALM” or “SEAT BELT

ALM”.

SEL023X

I DATA MONITOR and ACTIVE TEST are available for the warn-
ing chime.

SEL322W

EL-150
WARNING CHIME
CONSULT-II Application Items

CONSULT-II Application Items NAEL0316

GI
“KEY WARNING ALARM” NAEL0316S01
Data Monitor NAEL0316S0101 MA
Monitored Item Description

IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. EM

KEY ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.

DOOR SW DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH. LC

Active Test NAEL0316S0102
EC
Test Item Description

This test is able to check key warning chime operation. Key warning chime sounds for 2 FE
CHIME
seconds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen.

“LIGHT WARN ALM” NAEL0316S02 CL

Data Monitor NAEL0316S0201

Monitored Item Description MT

LIGHT SW 1ST Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lighting switch.

IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. AT

DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.

Active Test
TF
NAEL0316S0202

Test Item Description

PD
This test is able to check light warning chime operation. Light warning chime sounds for 2
CHIME
seconds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen.
AX
“SEAT BELT WARM ALM” NAEL0316S03
Data Monitor NAEL0316S0301
SU
Monitored Item Description

IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. BR

SEAT BELT SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of seat belt switch.

Active Test ST
NAEL0316S0302

Test Item Description

RS
This test is able to check seat belt warning chime operation. Seat belt warning chime
CHIME
sounds for 2 seconds after touching “ON” on CONSULT-II screen.
BT

IDX

EL-151
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NAEL0317

SYMPTOM CHART NAEL0317S01

REFERENCE PAGE (EL- ) 152 154 155 156 157

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4
(LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT
GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK

(KEY SWITCH INSERT

POWER SUPPLY AND

(SEAT BELT BUCKLE

SWITCH CHECK)
SIGNAL CHECK)

SIGNAL CHECK)
SYMPTOM

Light warning chime does not acti-

X X X
vate.

Ignition key warning chime does not

X X X
activate.

Seat belt warning chime does not

X X X
activate.

All warning chimes do not activate. X X

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK NAEL0317S02

Power Supply Circuit Check NAEL0317S0201

Terminals Voltage

(+) (–)

Terminal
Connector Battery voltage
(Wire color) Ground
M122 49 (G/R)

SEL989XA If NG, check the following.

I 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit
and fuse

EL-152
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Ground Circuit Check NAEL0317S0202 GI
Terminals Continuity

(+) MA
Terminal (–)
Connector
(Wire color) Yes EM
M122 43 (B)
Ground
M123 64 (B) LC

SEL990XA
AT

IDX

EL-153
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 (LIGHTING SWITCH
INPUT SIGNAL CHECK) =NAEL0317S03

1 CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check lighting switch (“LIGHT SW 1ST”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

SEL991X

Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminal 19 (R), connector M123 terminal 57
(R) and ground.

SEL992XA

OK or NG
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG © Check the following.
I 10A fuse (No. 61, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and tail lamp relay

EL-154
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 (KEY SWITCH INSERT GI
SIGNAL CHECK) =NAEL0317S04

1 CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL MA

With CONSULT-II
Check key switch (“KEY ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
EM

FE
SEL315W

Without CONSULT-II
CL
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 25 (W/R) and ground.
MT

PD
SEL011Y

OK or NG AX
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG © GO TO 2.
SU

2 CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)

BR
Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2.

SEL308X
HA
OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
SC
I 10A fuse [No. 13, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key switch
NG © Replace key switch.
IDX

EL-155
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 (SEAT BELT BUCKLE
SWITCH CHECK) =NAEL0317S05

1 CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check seat belt buckle switch (“SEAT BELT SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

SEL317W

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 28 (B/Y) and ground.

SEL994X

OK or NG
OK © Replace smart entrance control unit.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH

Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2 when seat belt is fastened and unfastened.

SEL381X

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Seat belt buckle switch ground circuit
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and seat belt buckle
switch
NG © Replace seat belt buckle switch.

EL-156
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 NAEL0317S06
GI
1 CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II MA
Check ignition switch ON signal (“IGN ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

FE
SEL318W

Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 27 (W/B) and ground. CL

SEL995X PD
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2. AX
NG © Check the following.
I 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse
SU

IDX

EL-157
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check driver door switch signal (“DOOR SW-DR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

SEL319W

Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminal 1 (G/R) and ground.

SEL996X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 3.

3 CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH

Check continuity between terminals 2 and 3.

SEL383X

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Driver side door switch ground circuit and condition
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and driver side door
switch
NG © Replace driver side door switch.

EL-158
WARNING CHIME
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

4 CHECK WARNING CHIME GI

With CONSULT-II
Perform “CHIME” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. MA

SEL320W
FE
OK or NG
OK © System is OK.
CL
NG © Replace smart entrance control unit.

IDX

EL-159
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
System Description

System Description NAEL0318

WIPER OPERATION NAEL0318S01
The front wiper switch is controlled by a lever built into the combination switch.
There are three wiper switch positions:
I LO speed
I HI speed
I INT (Intermittent)
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
I through 20A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to front wiper motor terminal 1, and
I to front wiper switch terminal 15.
Low and High Speed Wiper Operation NAEL0318S0101
Ground is supplied to front wiper switch terminal 17 through body grounds E13 and E41.
When the wiper switch is placed in the LO position, ground is supplied
I through terminal 14 of the front wiper switch
I to front wiper motor terminal 5.
With power and ground supplied, the front wiper motor operates at low speed.
When the front wiper switch is placed in the HI position, ground is supplied
I through terminal 16 of the front wiper switch
I to front wiper motor terminal 3.
With power and ground supplied, the front wiper motor operates at high speed.
Auto Stop Operation NAEL0318S0102
With front wiper switch turned OFF, front wiper motor will continue to operate until wiper arms reach windshield
base.
When wiper arms are not located at base of windshield with front wiper switch OFF, ground is provided
I from terminal 14 of the front wiper switch
I to front wiper motor terminal 5, in order to continue front wiper motor operation at low speed.
Ground is also supplied
I to terminal 13 of the front wiper switch
I through front wiper motor terminal 4
I through terminal 6 of the front wiper motor, and
I through body grounds M77 and M111.
When wiper arms reach base of windshield, front wiper motor terminals 1 and 4 are connected instead of ter-
minals 4 and 6. Wiper motor will then stop wiper arms at the PARK position.
Intermittent Operation NAEL0318S0103
The front wiper motor operates the wiper arms one time at low speed at a set interval of approximately 2 to
13 seconds. This feature is controlled by the wiper amplifier built in the front wiper switch.
When the front wiper switch is placed in the INT position, ground is supplied
I to wiper amplifier (INT SW)
I from front wiper switch terminal 17
I through body grounds E13 and E41, and
I to front wiper motor terminal 5
I through the front wiper switch terminal 14
I through wiper amplifier (OUTPUT)
WASHER OPERATION NAEL0318S02
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
I through 20A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to front washer motor terminal 1.
When the lever is pulled to the WASH position, ground is supplied
I to front washer motor terminal 2
I through terminal 18 of the front wiper switch
EL-160
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
System Description (Cont’d)
I through terminal 17 of the front wiper switch, and GI
I through body grounds E13 and E41.
With power and ground supplied, the front washer motor operates.
When the lever is pulled to the WASH position for one second or more, the front wiper motor operates at low MA
speed for approximately 3 seconds to clean windshield. This feature is controlled by the wiper amplifier in the
same manner as the intermittent operation.
EM

IDX

EL-161
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
Wiring Diagram — WIPER —

Wiring Diagram — WIPER — NAEL0319

MEL349N

EL-162
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
Removal and Installation

Removal and Installation NAEL0320

GI
WIPER ARMS NAEL0320S01
1. Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate
wiper motor and then turn it “OFF” (Auto Stop).
MA
2. Lift the blade up and then set it down onto glass surface to set
the blade center to clearance “L1” & “L2” immediately before EM
tightening nut.
3. Eject washer fluid. Turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor
and then turn it “OFF”. LC
4. Ensure that wiper blades stop within clearance “L1” & “L2”.
SEL543TA
Clearance “L1”: 29 - 39 mm (1.14 - 1.54 in)
Clearance “L2”: 32 - 42 mm (1.26 - 1.65 in)
EC
I Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque.
Front wiper: 21 - 26 N·m (2.1 - 2.7 kg-m, 15 - 20 ft-lb) FE

AT
I Before reinstalling wiper arm, clean up the pivot area as
illustrated. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm loose-
ness. TF

SEL024J SU
WIPER LINKAGE NAEL0320S02

MEL840F

IDX

EL-163
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER
Removal and Installation (Cont’d)
Removal NAEL0320S0201
1. Remove 4 bolts that secure wiper motor.
2. Detach wiper motor from wiper linkage at ball joint.
3. Remove wiper linkage.
Be careful not to break ball joint rubber boot.
Installation NAEL0320S0202
I Grease ball joint portion before installation.
1. Installation is the reverse order of removal.

Washer Nozzle Adjustment NAEL0321

I Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown in the figure
at left.
Adjustable range: ±10°

MEL137M

Unit: mm (in)

1 251 (9.88) 6 459 (18.07)

2 315 (12.40) 7 256 (10.08)

3 165 (6.50) 8 67 (2.64)

4 269 (10.59) 9 40 (1.57)

*5 167 (6.57)

*A: The diameters of these circles are less than 80 mm (3.15 in).
*B: The diameters of these circles are less than 138 × 80 mm (5.43 × 3.15 in).
MEL540M
*C: The diameters of these circles are less than 96 × 80 mm (3.78 × 3.15 in).
Washer Tube Layout NAEL0322

MEL074H

EL-164
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
System Description

System Description NAEL0323

GI
WIPER OPERATION NAEL0323S01
Power Supply and Ground NAEL0323S0101 MA
With ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
I through 10A fuse [No. 29, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to rear wiper motor terminal 4. EM
When the glass hatch switch is OPEN, ground is supplied
I to rear wiper motor terminal 6 LC
I through glass hatch switch terminal 1 and 2
I through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
Ground is supplied EC
I to rear wiper motor terminal 8
I through body grounds B11, B22 and D210. FE
Wiper Operation NAEL0323S0102
When the rear wiper switch is turned ON, ground is supplied CL
I to rear wiper motor terminal 2
I through combination switch terminals 22 and 24
I through body grounds E13 and E41. MT
Then, power is supplied
I to rear wiper motor terminal 4. AT
Ground is supplied
I to rear wiper motor terminal 8
I through body grounds B11, B22 and D210. TF
With power and ground supplied, the wiper motor operates.
Auto Stop Operation PD
NAEL0323S0103
With rear wiper switch turned OFF, rear wiper motor will continue to operate until wiper arm reaches rear wiper
stopper.
Then wiper motor turns the other way and wiper arm moves once until wiper arm reaches stopper.
AX
Intermittent Operation
The rear wiper motor operates the wiper arms at low speed approximately every 7 seconds.
NAEL0323S0104
SU
When the wiper switch is placed in the INT position, ground is supplied
I to wiper motor terminal 3 BR
I through rear wiper switch terminal 21 and 24
I through body grounds E13 and E41.
Then, power is supplied ST
I to rear wiper motor terminal 4.
Ground is supplied RS
I to rear wiper motor terminal 8
I through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
With power and ground supplied, rear wiper operates at intermittent. BT
WIPER OPERATION PROHIBIT CONTROL NAEL0323S02
When glass hatch is open with back door key cylinder while rear wiper is operated, wiper operation is stopped. HA
(Wiper operation prohibit control)
When glass hatch is closed and rear wiper switch turns from OFF and then rear wiper switch is turned to ON,
wiper operation prohibit control is canceled. SC
WASHER OPERATION NAEL0323S03
When the rear wiper switch is turned to WASH position, ground is supplied
I to rear wiper motor terminal 5
I through terminals 23 and 24 IDX
I through body grounds E13 and E41.

EL-165
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
System Description (Cont’d)
Then, power is supplied
I to rear washer motor terminal 2
I through 10 A fuse [No. 29, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Ground is supplied
I to rear washer motor terminal 1
I through rear wiper switch terminals 23 and 24
I through body grounds E13 and E41.
With power and ground supplied, the rear washer motor operates.
When the rear wiper switch is turned to WASH position for 0.4 seconds or more, the rear wiper motor oper-
ates approximately 3 times after the rear wiper switch is released.

EL-166
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
Wiring Diagram — WIP/R —

Wiring Diagram — WIP/R — NAEL0324

MEL407O
IDX

EL-167
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
Wiring Diagram — WIP/R — (Cont’d)

MEL408O

EL-168
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NAEL0325

GI
REAR WIPER MOTOR INSPECTION TABLE NAEL0325S01
(Data are reference values.)
MA
Terminal No. Item Condition Voltage
(Approximate value)
EM
2 ON switch Rear wiper switch ON Less than 1V

OFF or INT Battery voltage

LC
3 Intermittent switch Rear wiper switch INT Less than 1V

OFF, ON or WASH Battery voltage

EC
4 Power supply (ACC) — Battery voltage

FE
5 Washer switch Rear wiper switch WASH Less than 1V

OFF, ON or INT Battery voltage

CL
6 Glass hatch switch Glass hatch Open Less than 1V

Closed Battery voltage MT

8 Ground — —

NOTE: AT
Power to the rear wiper motor will be interrupted when the rear glass hatch is opened. In that case, conduct
the inspection of the rear wiper motor with the rear glass hatch closed, unless otherwise indicated.
TF

SU
Removal and Installation NAEL0326
WIPER ARMS NAEL0326S01 BR
1. Prior to wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate
wiper motor and then turn it “OFF” (Auto Stop).
2. Install wiper arm to portion A as in figure below and tighten ST
wiper arm nut to specification.
3. Then, set wiper arm to portion B.
RS
: 13 - 18 N·m (1.3 - 1.8 kg-m, 9 - 13 ft-lb)

MEL066G BT
I Before reinstalling wiper arm, clean up the pivot area as
illustrated. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm loose- HA
ness.

IDX
SEL024J

EL-169
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
Washer Nozzle Adjustment

Washer Nozzle Adjustment NAEL0327

I Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown in the figure
at left.
Adjustable range: ±10° (In any direction)

SEL241P

MEL034G

Washer Tube Layout NAEL0328

MEL067G

Check Valve NAEL0329

I A check valve is provided in the washer fluid line. Be careful
not to connect check valve to washer tube in the wrong direc-
tion.

SEL411H

EL-170
HORN
Wiring Diagram — HORN —

Wiring Diagram — HORN — NAEL0330

MEL428O
IDX

EL-171
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
Wiring Diagram — CIGAR —

Wiring Diagram — CIGAR — NAEL0331

MEL353N

EL-172
CLOCK
Wiring Diagram — CLOCK —

Wiring Diagram — CLOCK — NAEL0332

MEL035M
IDX

EL-173
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location

Component Parts and Harness Connector

Location NAEL0333

SEL483Y

System Description NAEL0334

The rear window defogger system is controlled by the smart entrance control unit. The rear window defogger
operates only for approximately 15 minutes.
Power is supplied at all times
I to rear window defogger relay terminal 3
I through 20A fuse (No. 56, located in the fuse and fusible link box) and
I to rear window defogger relay terminal 6
I through 20A fuse (No. 57, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 49
I through 7.5A [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to the rear window defogger relay terminal 1, and
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 27.
Ground is supplied
I to terminal 1 of the rear window defogger switch
I through body grounds M4, M66 and M147,
I to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64
I through body grounds M77 and M111.
When the rear window defogger switch is turned ON, ground is supplied

EL-174
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
System Description (Cont’d)
I through terminal 2 of the rear window defogger switch GI
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 14.
Terminal 37 of the smart entrance control unit then supplies ground to the rear window defogger relay termi-
nal 2. MA
With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger relay is energized.
Power is supplied
I through terminals 5 and 7 of the rear window defogger relay
EM
I to the rear window defogger.
The rear window defogger has an independent ground. LC
With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger filaments heat and defog the rear window.
When the system is activated, the rear window defogger indicator illuminates in the rear window defogger
switch. EC
Power is supplied
I to terminal 3 of the rear window defogger switch
I from terminal 7 of the rear window defogger relay. FE
Terminal 4 of the rear window defogger switch is grounded through body grounds M4, M66 and M147.
CL

IDX

EL-175
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Wiring Diagram — DEF —

Wiring Diagram — DEF — NAEL0335

MEL867N

EL-176
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Wiring Diagram — DEF — (Cont’d)

MEL418P

IDX

EL-177
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure

CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure NAEL0336

“REAR DEFOGGER” NAEL0336S01
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to the data link connector.

SEL331X

3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

4. Touch “START”.

PBR455D

5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.

SEL398Y

6. Touch “REAR DEFOGGER”.

SEL023X

7. Select diagnosis mode.

“DATA MONITOR” and “ACTIVE TEST” are available.

SEL322W

EL-178
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
CONSULT-II Application Items

CONSULT-II Application Items NAEL0337

GI
“REAR DEFOGGER” NAEL0337S01
Data Monitor NAEL0337S0101 MA
Monitored Item Description

IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. EM

REAR DEF SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear window defogger switch.
LC
Active Test NAEL0337S0102

Test Item Description

EC
This test is able to check rear window defogger operation. Rear window defogger activates
REAR DEFOGGER
when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
FE

IDX

EL-179
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NAEL0338

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE NAEL0338S01
SYMPTOM: Rear window defogger does not activate, or does
not go off after activating.
1 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER OUTPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II
Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “REAR DEFOGGER” with CONSULT-II.

SEL353W

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 37 (G/B) and ground.

SEL997X

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Rear window defogger relay (Refer to EL-183.)
I Rear window defogger circuit
I Rear window defogger filament (Refer to EL-183.)
NG © GO TO 2.

EL-180
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DEFOGGER RELAY COIL SIDE CIRCUIT GI

1. Disconnect control unit connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ON position. MA
3. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 37 (G/B) and ground.

SEL998X
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. CL
NG © Check the following.
I 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)] MT
I Rear window defogger relay
I Harness for open or short between fuse and rear window defogger relay
I Harness for open or short between rear window defogger relay and smart entrance AT
control unit

IDX

EL-181
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

3 CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Select “REAR DEF SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

SEL352W

Without CONSULT-II
Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminal 14 (OR) and ground.

SEL999X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Check the following.
I Rear window defogger switch (Refer to EL-183.)
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and rear window defog-
ger switch
I Rear window defogger switch ground circuit

4 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND IGNITION INPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 27 (W/B), M123 terminal 49 (G/R)
and ground.

SEL001Y

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Check the following.
I 7.5A fuse [No. 11 or No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse

EL-182
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

5 CHECK CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT GI

Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 43 (B), M123 terminal 64 (B) and
ground. MA

SEL002Y
FE
Yes © Replace smart entrance control unit.
No © Repair harness or connectors.
CL

AT
Electrical Components Inspection NAEL0339
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
NAEL0339S01
TF
Condition Continuity
PD
12V direct current supply between ter-
Yes
minals 1 and 2

No current supply No AX

SEC202B SU
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH NAEL0339S02
Check continuity between terminals when rear window defogger
switch is pushed and released.
BR
Terminals Condition Continuity
ST
Rear window defogger
Yes
switch is pushed
1-2
Rear window defogger RS
No
switch is released

SEL430TB BT
Filament Check NAEL0340
1. Attach probe circuit tester (in volt range) to middle portion of HA
each filament.
SC

IDX
SEL263

EL-183
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Filament Check (Cont’d)
2. If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or 12 volts.
3. To locate burned out point, move probe to left and right along
filament. Test needle will swing abruptly when probe passes
the point.

SEL265

I When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of

the negative probe. Then press the foil against the wire
with your finger.

SEL122R

Filament Repair NAEL0341

REPAIR EQUIPMENT NAEL0341S01
1) Conductive silver composition (Dupont No. 4817 or equivalent)
2) Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long
3) Drawing pen
4) Heat gun
5) Alcohol
6) Cloth

REPAIRING PROCEDURE NAEL0341S02

1. Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a
cloth dampened in alcohol.
2. Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of
drawing pen.
Shake silver composition container before use.
3. Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive sil-
ver composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap
existing heat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of
the break.
BE540

EL-184
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Filament Repair (Cont’d)
4. After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for con- GI
tinuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver
composition is deposited.
Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted. MA

LC
SEL012D

5. Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area EC

for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun. A minimum dis-
tance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area
and hot air outlet. If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired FE
area dry for 24 hours.
CL

MT
SEL013D
AT

IDX

EL-185
AUDIO
System Description

System Description NAEL0342

Refer to Owner’s Manual for audio system operating instructions.
BASE SYSTEM NAEL0342S01
Power is supplied at all times
I through 15A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to audio unit terminal 6, and
I to CD player terminal 4 (with CD player).
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
I through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to audio unit terminal 10, and
I to CD player terminal 1 (with CD player).
Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit.
When the audio unit power knob is pushed to the ON position, audio signals are supplied
I through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15 and 16
I to the front and rear speakers.
BOSE SYSTEM NAEL0342S02
Power is supplied at all times
I through 15A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to audio unit terminal 6,
I to audio amp. relay terminal 3,
I to rear speaker amp. terminal 11,
I to CD auto changer terminal 12 (with CD auto changer) and
I to AUX box terminal 7 (with rear TV).
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
I through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to audio unit terminal 10,
I to CD auto changer terminal 16 (with CD auto changer) and
I to AUX box terminal 6 (with rear TV).
Ground is supplied through the case of the audio unit.
Ground is supplied
I to audio amp. relay terminal 2,
I through body grounds M4, M66 and M147
I to front door speaker LH terminal 5 and
I to front door speaker RH terminal 5
I through body grounds M77 and M111
I to rear speaker amp. terminal 24 and
I to AUX box terminal 8 (with rear TV)
I through body grounds B11, B22 and D210
I to CD auto changer terminal 15 and
I to rear TV switch terminal 3
I through body grounds M4, M66 and M147.
When the audio unit POWER button is pressed, power is supplied to rear speaker amp. terminal 9 and audio
amp. relay terminal 1 from audio unit terminal 12. Then audio amp. relay is energized and power is supplied
I to front door speaker LH terminal 4 and
I to front door speaker RH terminal 4.
Audio signals are supplied
I through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15 and 16
I to terminals 2 and 6 of the LH and RH front speakers and terminals 5, 7, 18 and 20 of the rear speaker
amp.
I to LH and RH tweeters through terminals 1 and 3 of the front speakers
I to rear LH and RH speakers through terminals 1, 2, 25 and 26 of the rear speaker amp.

EL-186
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/Base System

Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/Base System NAEL0343

MEL355N
IDX

EL-187
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/Base System (Cont’d)

MEL038M

EL-188
AUDIO
Schematic/BOSE System

Schematic/BOSE System NAEL0344

MEL356N
IDX

EL-189
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/BOSE System

Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/BOSE System NAEL0345

MEL357N

EL-190
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/BOSE System (Cont’d)

MEL419P

IDX

EL-191
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/BOSE System (Cont’d)

MEL359N

EL-192
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/BOSE System (Cont’d)

MEL556P

IDX

EL-193
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — AUDIO —/BOSE System (Cont’d)

MEL044M

EL-194
AUDIO
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NAEL0346

GI
AUDIO UNIT NAEL0346S01

Symptom Possible causes Repair order MA

Audio unit inoperative (no 1. 10A fuse 1. Check 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)].
digital display and no 2. Poor audio unit case ground Turn ignition switch ON and verify that battery posi- EM
sound from speakers). 3. Audio unit tive voltage is present at terminal 10 of audio unit.
2. Check audio unit case ground.
3. Remove audio unit for repair.
LC
Audio unit presets are lost 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse [No. 4, located in fuse block (J/B)]
when ignition switch is 2. Audio unit and verify that battery positive voltage is present at
turned OFF. terminal 6 of audio unit. EC
2. Remove audio unit for repair.

AM stations are weak or 1. Antenna 1. Check antenna.

noisy (FM stations OK). 2. Poor audio unit ground 2. Check audio unit ground. FE
3. Audio unit 3. Remove audio unit for repair.

FM stations are weak or 1. Window antenna 1. Check window antenna. CL

noisy (AM stations OK). 2. Audio unit 2. Remove audio unit for repair.

Audio unit generates noise 1. Poor audio unit ground 1. Check audio unit ground.
in AM and FM modes with 2. Loose or missing ground bonding 2. Check ground bonding straps. MT
engine running. straps 3. Replace ignition condenser or rear window defogger
3. Ignition condenser or rear window noise suppressor condenser.
defogger noise suppressor condenser 4. Check alternator. AT
4. Alternator 5. Check ignition coil and secondary wiring.
5. Ignition coil or secondary wiring 6. Remove audio unit for repair.
6. Audio unit TF
Audio unit generates noise 1. Poor audio unit ground 1. Check audio unit ground.
in AM and FM modes with 2. Antenna 2. Check antenna.
accessories on (switch 3. Accessory ground 3. Check accessory ground. PD
pops and motor noise). 4. Faulty accessory 4. Replace accessory.

BASE SYSTEM AX
NAEL0346S02

Symptom Possible causes Repair order

SU
Individual speaker is noisy 1. Speaker 1. Check speaker.
or inoperative. 2. Audio unit output 2. Check audio unit output voltages.
3. Speaker circuit 3. Check wires for open or short between audio unit
4. Audio unit and speaker.
BR
4. Remove audio unit for repair.

BOSE SYSTEM ST
NAEL0346S03

Symptom Possible causes Repair order

RS
Audio unit controls are 1. 15A fuse 1. Check 15A fuse [No. 4, located in fuse block (J/B)].
operational, but no sound 2. Audio unit output Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal 2
is heard from any speaker. 3. Audio unit of audio amp. relay. BT
2. Check audio unit output voltage (Terminal 12).
3. Remove audio unit for repair.

All front speakers are inop- 1. Audio amp. relay 1. Check audio amp. relay. HA
erative. 2. Audio amp. relay ground 2. Check audio amp. relay ground (Terminal 3).
3. Amp. ON signal 3. Turn ignition switch ACC and audio unit ON. Verify
battery positive voltage is present at terminal 1 of SC
audio amp. relay.

Individual front speaker is 1. Speaker ground 1. Check speaker ground (Terminal 5).
noisy or inoperative. 2. Power supply 2. Check power supply for speaker (Terminal 4).
3. Audio unit output 3. Check audio unit output voltage for speaker.
4. Speaker 4. Replace speaker.
IDX

EL-195
AUDIO
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

Symptom Possible causes Repair order

Both rear speakers are 1. Poor rear speaker amp. ground 1. Check rear speaker amp. ground circuit.
inoperative. 2. Power supply 2. Check power supply for rear speaker amp. (Terminal
3. Amp. ON signal 11).
4. Rear speaker amp. 3. Turn ignition switch ACC and audio unit ON. Verify
battery positive voltage is present at terminal 9 of
rear speaker amp.
4. Remove rear speaker amp. for repair.

Individual rear speaker is 1. Speaker 1. Check speaker.

noisy or inoperative. 2. Audio unit/amp. output 2. Check audio unit/amp. output.
3. Speaker circuit 3. Check wires for open or short between audio unit/
4. Audio unit amp. and speakers.
4. Remove audio unit for repair.

Inspection NAEL0347
AUDIO UNIT AND AMP. NAEL0347S01
All voltage inspections are made with:
I Ignition switch ON or ACC
I Audio unit ON
I Audio unit and amps. connected (If audio unit or amp. is removed for inspection, supply a ground to the
case using a jumper wire.)
ANTENNA NAEL0347S02
1. Using a jumper wire, clip an auxiliary ground between antenna and body.
I If reception improves, check antenna ground (at body surface).
I If reception does not improve, check main feeder cable for short circuit or open circuit.
Audio Unit Removal and Installation NAEL0348
1. Lock the CD changer unit mechanism (if so equipped) prior to removing a malfunctioning CD changer unit.
Refer to “LOCKING CD CHANGER UNIT MECHANISM”, EL-196.
2. Remove CD changer unit. Refer to BT-22, “INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY”.
LOCKING CD CHANGER UNIT MECHANISM NAEL0348S01
CAUTION:
I Prior to removing a malfunctioning CD changer unit that will be shipped for repair, the changer
mechanism MUST BE LOCKED to prevent the mechanism from being damaged during shipping.
I If a CD is jammed or unable to be removed from the unit, do NOT lock the changer mechanism. If
the unit is to be shipped for repair, carefully package the unit to prevent vibration and shock.
1. Eject and remove any CDs from the CD changer unit.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF. Wait until CD changer unit display is off and mechanism stops moving (mecha-
nism sound stops).
3. Press any one of the disc selection buttons once. When a display shows on the CD changer unit, press
the same disc selection button again within 5 seconds.
I The changer mechanism will lock itself within 10 seconds.
4. After mechanism stops moving (mechanism sound stops), disconnect the CD changer unit connectors.
NOTE:
After installing a new or remanufactured CD changer unit, switching the CD changer unit ON will automati-
cally unlock the mechanism. A special unlocking procedure is not required.

EL-196
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram — REMOTE —

Wiring Diagram — REMOTE — NAEL0349

MEL409O
IDX

EL-197
AUDIO ANTENNA
System Description

System Description NAEL0350

Power is supplied at all times
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to power antenna terminal 6.
Ground is supplied to the power antenna terminal 2 through body grounds M4, M66 and M147.
When the audio unit is turned to the ON position, battery positive voltage is supplied
I through audio unit terminal 5
I to power antenna terminal 4.
The antenna raises and is held in the extended position.
When the audio unit is turned to the OFF position, battery positive voltage is interrupted
I from audio unit terminal 5
I to power antenna terminal 4.
The antenna retracts.

EL-198
AUDIO ANTENNA
Wiring Diagram — P/ANT —

Wiring Diagram — P/ANT — NAEL0351

MEL824L
IDX

EL-199
AUDIO ANTENNA
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NAEL0352

POWER ANTENNA NAEL0352S01

Symptom Possible causes Repair order

Power antenna does not 1. 7.5A fuse 1. Check 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block
operate. 2. Audio unit signal (J/B)]. Verify that battery positive voltage is present
3. Grounds M4, M66 and M147 at terminal 6 of power antenna.
2. Turn ignition switch and audio unit ON. Verify that
battery positive voltage is present at terminal 4 of
power antenna.
3. Check grounds M4, M66 and M147.

Location of Antenna NAEL0353

YEL067K

Antenna Rod Replacement NAEL0354

REMOVAL NAEL0354S01
1. Remove antenna nut and antenna base.

MEL036G

EL-200
AUDIO ANTENNA
Antenna Rod Replacement (Cont’d)
2. Withdraw antenna rod while raising it by operating antenna GI
motor.

LC
MEL037G

INSTALLATION EC
NAEL0354S02
1. Lower antenna rod by operating antenna motor.
2. Insert gear section of antenna rope into place with it facing FE
toward antenna motor.
3. As soon as antenna rope is wound on antenna motor, stop
antenna motor. Insert antenna rod lower end into antenna CL
motor pipe.
4. Retract antenna rod completely by operating antenna motor.
5. Install antenna nut and base. MT

MEL038G SU

IDX

EL-201
POWER SUNROOF
System Description

System Description NAEL0355

OUTLINE NAEL0355S01
Electric sunroof system consists of
I Sunroof switch
I Sunroof motor
I Smart entrance control unit
Smart entrance control unit controls retained power operation.
OPERATION NAEL0355S02
The sunroof can be tilted up or down with the tilt switch.
The sunroof can be opened or closed automatically with the sunroof switch.
RETAINED POWER OPERATION NAEL0355S04
When the ignition switch is turned to OFF position from ON or START position, power is supplied for 45 sec-
onds
I to power window relay terminal 2
I from smart entrance control unit terminal 46.
Ground is always supplied
I to power window relay terminal 1
I through body grounds.
When power and ground are supplied, power window relay continues to be energized, and the electrical sun-
roof can be operated.
When power is supplied, the electrical sunroof can be operated.
The retained power operation is canceled when the driver or passenger side door is opened.
RAP signal period can be changed by CONSULT-II. (EL-206)
INTERRUPTION DETECTION FUNCTION NAEL0355S05
The CPU of sunroof motor monitors the sunroof motor operation and the sunroof position (full closed or other)
for sunroof by the signals from encoder and limit switch in sunroof motor.
When sunroof motor detects interruption during the following close operation,
I automatic close operation when ignition switch is in the “ON” position
I automatic close operation during retained power operation
sunroof switch controls the motor for open and the sunroof will operate about 150 mm (5.91 in).

EL-202
POWER SUNROOF
Wiring Diagram — SROOF —

Wiring Diagram — SROOF — NAEL0356

MEL429O
IDX

EL-203
POWER SUNROOF
Wiring Diagram — SROOF — (Cont’d)

MEL420P

EL-204
POWER SUNROOF
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure

CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure =NAEL0357

GI
“RETAINED PWR” NAEL0357S01
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
MA
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to the data link connector.

LC
SEL331X

3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. EC

4. Touch “START”.
FE

MT
PBR455D
AT
5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.

SEL398Y SU
6. Touch “RETAINED PWR”.
BR

SEL273W BT
7. Select diagnosis mode.
“DATA MONITOR” and “ACTIVE TEST” are available. HA

IDX
SEL322W

EL-205
POWER SUNROOF
CONSULT-II Application Items

CONSULT-II Application Items NAEL0455

“RETAINED PWR” NAEL0455S01
Data Monitor NAEL0455S0101

Monitored Item Description

IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.

DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.

DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.

Active Test NAEL0455S0102

Test Item Description

This test is able to supply RAP signal (power) from smart entrance control unit to power
window system, power sunroof system. Those systems can be operated when turning on
“RETAINED PWR” on CONSULT-II screen even if the ignition switch is tuned OFF.
NOTE:
RETAINED PWR During this test, CONSULT-II can be operated with ignition switch “OFF” position.
“RETAINED PWR” should be turned “ON” or “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen when
ignition switch is ON. Then turn ignition switch OFF for checking retained power
operation. CONSULT-II might be stuck if “RETAINED PWR” is turned “ON” or “OFF”
on CONSULT-II screen when ignition switch is OFF.

Work Support NAEL0455S0103

Work Item Description

RAP signal’s power supply period can be changed by mode setting. Selects RAP signal’s
RETAINED PWR SET power supply period between three steps.
I MODE 1 (45 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF)/MODE 3 (2 min.)

Trouble Diagnoses NAEL0456

Symptom Possible cause Repair order

Power sunroof cannot be operated 1. 7.5A fuse, 40A fusible link and 1. Check 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in fuse block
using any switch. M145 circuit breaker (J/B)], 40A fusible link (letter f, located in fuse and
2. Power window relay ground cir- fusible link box) and M145 circuit breaker. Turn igni-
cuit tion switch “ON” and verify battery positive voltage is
3. Sunroof motor ground circuit present at terminals 2 and 3 of power window relay
4. Power window relay and terminal 1 of sunroof motor.
5. Sunroof motor circuit 2. Check power window relay ground circuit.
6. Sunroof switch 3. Check sunroof motor ground circuit.
7. Sunroof switch circuit 4. Check power window relay.
8. Sunroof motor 5. Check the wire between power window relay and
sunroof motor.
6. Check sunroof switch.
7. Check harness between sunroof switch and sunroof
motor.
8. Check sunroof motor.

Power sunroof cannot be operated 1. Sunroof switch 1. Check sunroof switch.

using one of the sunroof switches. 2. Sunroof switch circuit 2. Check the harness between sunroof motor and sun-
roof switch.

EL-206
POWER SUNROOF
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

Symptom Possible cause Repair order GI

Power sunroof cannot be opened 1. Full closed position not initial- 1. Initialize full closed position.
or closed fully. ized 2. Check the following. MA
2. Sunroof slide mechanism a. Check obstacles in sunroof, etc.
3. Sunroof switch b. Check worn or deformed sunroof.
4. Sunroof switch circuit c. Check sunroof sash tilted too far inward or outward.
5. Sunroof motor 3. Check sunroof switch.
EM
4. Check harness between sunroof motor and sunroof
switch.
5. Replace sunroof motor. LC
Retained power operation does not 1. RAP signal circuit 1. Check RAP signal.
operate properly. 2. Driver or passenger side door a. (With CONSULT-II) EC
switch circuit Check RAP signal with CONSULT-II. Use “ACTIVE
3. Smart entrance control unit TEST” mode, “RETAINED PWR” in “SMART
ENTRANCE”. (Refer to EL-206.) FE
If NG, go to the step b. below.
b. Verify 12 positive voltage from smart entrance con-
trol unit is present at terminal 2 of power window
relay: CL
I Within 45 seconds after ignition switch turns off.
I When front door LH and RH is closed.
2. Check harness between smart entrance control unit MT
and driver or passenger side door switch.
Check driver or passenger side door switch.
Check driver or passenger side door switch. AT
3. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-378)

IDX

EL-207
DOOR MIRROR
Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —

Wiring Diagram — MIRROR — NAEL0360

MEL421P

EL-208
POWER SEAT
Wiring Diagram — SEAT —

Wiring Diagram — SEAT — NAEL0361

MEL830L
IDX

EL-209
POWER SEAT
Wiring Diagram — SEAT — (Cont’d)

MEL601F

EL-210
HEATED SEAT
Wiring Diagram — HSEAT —

Wiring Diagram — HSEAT — NAEL0362

MEL046M
IDX

EL-211
HEATED SEAT
Seatback Heating Unit

Seatback Heating Unit NAEL0363

SBT314

EL-212
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location

Component Parts and Harness Connector GI

Location NAEL0364

PD
SEL190Y

IDX

EL-213
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
System Description

System Description =NAEL0365

OPERATIVE CONDITION NAEL0365S01
The drive position can be set in 2 ways, manually and automatically.
Manual Operation NAEL0365S0101
The driver’s seat can be adjusted for sliding, reclining, front cushion height and rear cushion height with the
LH power seat switches. The manual operation can be adjusted with the IGN key in any position.
Automatic Operation NAEL0365S0102
The driver’s seat is adjusted to the proper positions for the driver automatically, in 3 different ways: MEMORY
AUTOMATIC SET, AUTOMATIC EXITING SETTING and AUTOMATIC SET RETURN. (Automatic Drive Posi-
tioner = ADP)
CONDITIONS INHIBITING AUTOMATIC OPERATION NAEL0365S02
Automatic memory setting procedures are suspended under any of the following conditions:
1) When vehicle speed is more than 7 km/h (4 MPH).
2) When driver’s side power seat switch is turned on.
3) When any two of the switches (set switch and memory switches 1 and 2) are turned ON.
4) When cancel switch is turned on.
5) When selector lever is in any position other than “P”.
6) When ignition switch is turned to “START” position.
(Operation resumes when ignition switch is returned to “ON”.)
7) When detention switch malfunction is detected:
I Detention switch failure is sensed when detention switch remains off for at least 2 seconds at a vehicle
speed of greater than 7 km/h (4 MPH).
FAIL-SAFE SYSTEM NAEL0365S03
Output Failure NAEL0365S0301
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, if any of the parts (indicated in the following chart) move more
than the specified amount within a period “T2” when no “ON” input is sent from any of the switches (indicated
in the following chart), or an output from the automatic drive positioner is not produced, an output failure is
sensed. Motor operation will be suspended automatically, and all automatic operations will be ineffective. (In
this case, the motor will not operate manually.)
OPERATED PORTION T2 Allowable measurement

Seat sliding Approx. 2.5 sec. Within 6 mm (0.24 in)

Seat reclining Same as above Change angle within 1°

Absolving NAEL0365S0302
When moving selector lever back to “P” position after having moved it to any position except “P”, fail-safe
operation will be canceled.
INITIALIZATION NAEL0365S04
After reconnecting battery cable, perform initialization procedure A or B. If initialization has not been performed,
automatic drive positioner will not operate.
PROCEDURE A
1) Insert key in the ignition key cylinder. (Ignition switch is in “OFF” position.)
2) Open , close , open driver side door. (Do not perform with the door switch operation.)
3) End
PROCEDURE B
1) Drive the vehicle at more than 25 km/h (16 MPH).
2) End

EL-214
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
System Description (Cont’d)
MEMORY AUTOMATIC SET =NAEL0365S05
GI
Two drive positions can be retained in the memory. Press memory switch to set driver’s seat to preset posi-
tion.
MA

PD
SEL592W

AX
NOTE:
I When memory switch for which driver’s seat positions are already retained in memory is pressed, new seat
positions will be retained in memory in place of the previously set positions. SU
I Drive position is erased from the memory when battery cable is disconnected more than 30 seconds. After
connecting battery cable, perform initialization procedures.
BR

SEL593W
IDX

EL-215
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
System Description (Cont’d)
NOTE:
1) Do not keep cancel switch pressed as it will not operate.
2) Automatic exiting setting will be performed.
3) The driver’s seat position (see the following Table) operates in the order of priority.
The order of priority Operated portion

1 Seat sliding

2 Seat reclining

3 Seat front lifting

4 Seat rear lifting

AUTOMATIC EXITING SETTING NAEL0365S06

“Exiting” positions:
Driver’s seat ... Slides about 40 mm (1.57 in) rear from normal sitting position.

SEL594W

AUTOMATIC SET RETURN NAEL0365S07

With driver’s seat set to the “exiting” position, operating one of the following procedures moves it to the posi-
tion previously retained in memory.

SEL595W

EL-216
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Schematic

Schematic NAEL0366
GI

MEL422P
IDX

EL-217
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP —

Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP — NAEL0367

MEL557P

EL-218
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP — (Cont’d)

MEL558P

IDX

EL-219
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP — (Cont’d)

MEL423P

EL-220
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP — (Cont’d)

MEL186M

IDX

EL-221
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP — (Cont’d)

MEL187M

EL-222
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
On Board Diagnosis

On Board Diagnosis NAEL0368

EC
SEL354X

HOW TO PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS NAEL0368S01 FE

SC
SEL596W

*1: If no malfunction is indicated, self-diagnosis will end after the vehicle speed sensor diagnosis is performed.
*2: Diagnosis ends after self-diagnostic results have been indicated for 10 minutes if left unattended.
IDX

EL-223
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
On Board Diagnosis (Cont’d)
MALFUNCTION CODE TABLE =NAEL0368S02
In this mode, a malfunction code is indicated by the number of flashes from the automatic drive positioner
indicator lamps (indicator lamp 1, indicator lamp 2) as shown below.

SEL597WA

Refer- Refer-
Code Detected Code Detected
Diagnostic procedure ence Diagnostic procedure ence
No. items No. items
page page

PROCEDURE 2 PROCEDURE 5
Seat
Seat (Sliding encoder check) EL-230 [Lifting encoder (rear) check] EL-236
1 4 lifting
sliding PROCEDURE 6 EL-238 PROCEDURE 9 EL-241
rear
(Sliding motor check) [Lifting motor (rear) check]

PROCEDURE 3
Vehicle
Seat (Reclining encoder check) EL-232 PROCEDURE 12
2 9 speed EL-244
reclining PROCEDURE 7 EL-239 (Vehicle speed sensor check)
sensor
(Reclining motor check)

PROCEDURE 4
Seat
[Lifting encoder (front) check] EL-234
3 lifting
PROCEDURE 8 EL-240
front
[Lifting motor (front) check]

EL-224
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NAEL0369

GI
WORK FLOW NAEL0369S01

SEL599W
BT
*1 EL-223 *2 EL-224
HA

IDX

EL-225
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
PRELIMINARY CHECK NAEL0369S02

SEL600W

*1: After reconnecting battery cable, perform initialization proce-

dure A or B.
If initialization has not been performed, automatic drive positioner
will not operate.
PROCEDURE A
1) Insert key in the ignition key cylinder. (Ignition switch is in
“OFF” position.)
2) Open , close , open driver side door. (Do not perform with
the door switch operation.)
3) End
PROCEDURE B
1) Drive the vehicle at more than 30 km/h (19 MPH).

EL-226
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
2) End GI
After performing preliminary check, go to symptom chart
below.
MA
Before starting trouble diagnoses below, perform preliminary
check, EL-226. Symptom numbers in the symptom chart cor-
respond with those of preliminary check. EM
SYMPTOM CHART NAEL0369S03
LC
PROCEDURE Diagnostic procedure

REFERENCE PAGE (EL- ) 229 230 232 234 236 238 239
EC

(Power supply and ground circuit

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7
[Lifting encoder (front) check]

[Lifting encoder (rear) check]

for Driver’s seat control unit)
FE

(Reclining encoder check)

(Reclining motor check)

(Sliding encoder check)

(Sliding motor check)

SYMPTOM CL

AT
1 No seat system functions operate. X

Some of the seat Sliding X

system functions
TF
do not operate Reclining X
2
during automatic/ Lifting (Front)
manual opera- PD
tion. Lifting (Rear)

No functions operate during auto- AX

matic operation, and some/all func-
3
tions do not during manual opera-
tion. SU
Sliding X
Some of the seat
system functions Reclining X BR
4 do not operate
during automatic Lifting (Front) X
operation.
Lifting (Rear) X ST
No automatic operation functions
5
operate.
RS
Drive position cannot be retained
6
in the memory.

Sliding
BT
Does not operate
during manual Reclining
7 operation. (Oper- HA
ates during auto- Lifting (Front)
matic operation.)
Lifting (Rear)
SC
Automatic operation cannot be
8
canceled.

9 Memory indicator does not light up.

X : Applicable
IDX

EL-227
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

PROCEDURE Diagnostic procedure

REFERENCE PAGE (EL- ) 240 241 242 243 244 247 247

and vehicle speed sensor check)

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 10

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 12

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 13

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 14
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 11

(Key, park position, door switch

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 9

(Seat memory switch check)

[Lifting motor (front) check]

[Lifting motor (rear) check]

(Power seat switch check)

(Memory indicator check)

(Cancel switch check)
SYMPTOM

1 No seat system functions operate.

Some of the seat Sliding

system functions
do not operate Reclining
2
during automatic/ Lifting (Front) X
manual opera-
tion. Lifting (Rear) X

No functions operate during auto- X

matic operation, and some/all func- (ACC, ON
3 X
tions do not during manual opera- START
tion. signal)

Sliding
Some of the seat
system functions Reclining
4 do not operate
during automatic Lifting (Front)
operation.
Lifting (Rear)

No automatic operation functions

5 X X
operate.

X
Drive position cannot be retained
6 (IGN ON X
in the memory.
signal)

Sliding X
Does not operate
during manual Reclining X
7 operation. (Oper-
ates during auto- Lifting (Front) X
matic operation.)
Lifting (Rear) X

Automatic operation cannot be

8 X
canceled.

9 Memory indicator does not light up. X

X : Applicable

EL-228
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 =NAEL0369S04 GI
(Power supply and ground circuit for driver’s seat control unit)
Power Supply Circuit Check NAEL0369S0401 MA
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 1 and ground.
Ignition switch position
Terminals EM
OFF ACC ON START

1 - Ground Battery voltage LC

SEL601W If NG, check the following.
I 40A fusible link (letter f, located in the fuse and fusible link box) EC
I Circuit breaker
I Harness for open or short between circuit breaker and seat
control unit LH FE

AT
Ground Circuit Check NAEL0369S0402
Check continuity between seat control unit LH terminal 33 and
ground. TF
Terminals Continuity

33 - Ground Yes PD

SEL602W SU

IDX

EL-229
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 =NAEL0369S05
(Sliding encoder check)
1 CHECK SLIDING ENCODER OUTPUT SIGNAL
Measure voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 18 and ground with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope when power seat
slide is operated.

SEL603W

OK or NG
OK © Sliding encoder is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK SLIDING ENCODER INPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 17 and ground.

SEL604W

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace seat control unit LH.

EL-230
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

3 CHECK SLIDING ENCODER OPEN CIRCUIT GI

1. Disconnect seat control unit LH connector and sliding device LH connector.
2. Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and sliding device LH connector. MA

SEL605WA
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
CL
NG © Repair harness.

MT
4 CHECK SLIDING ENCODER SHORT CIRCUIT
Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and ground.
AT

AX
SEL606W
SU
OK or NG
OK © Replace sliding encoder.
NG © Repair harness.
BR

IDX

EL-231
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 =NAEL0369S06
(Reclining encoder check)
1 CHECK RECLINING ENCODER OUTPUT SIGNAL
Measure voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 29 and ground with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope when power seat
reclining is operated.

SEL607W

OK or NG
OK © Reclining encoder is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK RECLINING ENCODER INPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 17 and ground.

SEL608W

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace seat control unit LH.

EL-232
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

3 CHECK RECLINING ENCODER OPEN CIRCUIT GI

1. Disconnect seat control unit LH connector and reclining device LH connector.
2. Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and reclining LH connector. MA

SEL609WA
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
CL
NG © Repair harness.

MT
4 CHECK RECLINING ENCODER SHORT CIRCUIT
Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and ground.
AT

AX
SEL610W
SU
OK or NG
OK © Replace reclining encoder.
NG © Repair harness.
BR

IDX

EL-233
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 =NAEL0369S07
[Lifting encoder (front) check]
1 CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (FRONT) OUTPUT SIGNAL
Measure voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 19 and ground with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope when power seat
lifting (front) is operated.

SEL611W

OK or NG
OK © Lifting encoder (front) is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (FRONT) INPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 17 and ground.

SEL612W

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace seat control unit LH.

EL-234
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

3 CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (FRONT) OPEN CIRCUIT GI

1. Disconnect seat control unit LH connector and front lifting device LH connector.
2. Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and front lifting device LH connector. MA

SEL613WA
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
CL
NG © Repair harness.

MT
4 CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (FRONT) SHORT CIRCUIT
Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and ground.
AT

AX
SEL614W
SU
OK or NG
OK © Replace lifting encoder (front).
NG © Repair harness.
BR

IDX

EL-235
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 =NAEL0369S08
[Lifting encoder (rear) check]
1 CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (REAR) OUTPUT SIGNAL
Measure voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 30 and ground with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope when power seat
lifting (rear) is operated.

SEL615W

OK or NG
OK © Lifting encoder (rear) is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 17 and ground.

SEL616W

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace seat control unit LH.

EL-236
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

3 CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (REAR) OPEN CIRCUIT GI

1. Disconnect seat control unit LH connector and rear lifting device LH connector.
2. Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and rear lifting device LH connector. MA

SEL617WA
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
CL
NG © Repair harness.

MT
4 CHECK LIFTING ENCODER (REAR) SHORT CIRCUIT
Check harness continuity between seat control unit LH connector and ground.
AT

AX
SEL618W
SU
OK or NG
OK © Replace lifting encoder (rear).
NG © Repair harness.
BR

IDX

EL-237
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 =NAEL0369S09
(Sliding motor check)
1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL TO SLIDING MOTOR
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminals 3 or 10 and ground.

SEL619W

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace seat control unit LH.

2 CHECK SLIDING MOTOR

1. Disconnect sliding device LH connector.
2. Apply 12V DC direct current to motor and check operation.

SEL620WA

OK or NG
OK © Check harness for operation between seat control unit LH and sliding motor.
NG © Replace sliding motor.

EL-238
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7 =NAEL0369S10
GI
(Reclining motor check)
1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL TO RECLINING MOTOR
MA
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminals 4 or 12 and ground.

FE
SEL621W

OK or NG
CL
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace seat control unit LH.
MT
2 CHECK RECLINING MOTOR
1. Disconnect reclining device LH connector.
AT
2. Apply 12V DC direct current to motor and check operation.
TF

SU
SEL622WA

OK or NG BR
OK © Check harness for operation between seat control unit LH and reclining motor.
NG © Replace reclining motor. ST

IDX

EL-239
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8 =NAEL0369S11
[Lifting motor (front) check]
1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL TO LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT)
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminals 5 or 13 and ground.

SEL623W

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace seat control unit LH.

2 CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT)

1. Disconnect front lifting device LH connector.
2. Apply 12V DC direct current to motor and check operation.

SEL624WA

OK or NG
OK © Check harness for operation between seat control unit LH and lifting motor (front).
NG © Replace lifting motor (front).

EL-240
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 9 =NAEL0369S12
GI
[Lifting motor (rear) check]
1 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL TO LIFTING MOTOR (REAR)
MA
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminals 6 or 7 and ground.

FE
SEL625W

OK or NG
CL
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace seat control unit LH.
MT
2 CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR)
1. Disconnect rear lifting device LH connector.
AT
2. Apply 12V DC direct current to motor and check operation.
TF

SU
SEL626WA

OK or NG BR
OK © Check harness for operation between seat control unit LH and lifting motor (rear).
NG © Replace lifting motor (rear). ST

IDX

EL-241
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 10 =NAEL0369S13
(Power seat switch check)
1 CHECK POWER SEAT SWITCH
1. Disconnect power seat switch LH connector.
2. Check continuity between power seat switch terminals.

SEL569X

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Ground circuit for power seat switch
I Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and power seat switch
NG © Replace power seat switch.

EL-242
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 11 =NAEL0369S14
GI
(Cancel switch check)
1 CHECK CANCEL SWITCH
MA
1. Disconnect cancel switch connector.
2. Check continuity between cancel switch terminals.
EM

FE
SEL628WA

OK or NG
CL
OK © Check the following.
I Ground circuit for cancel switch MT
I Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and cancel switch
NG © Replace cancel switch.
AT

IDX

EL-243
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 12 =NAEL0369S15
(Key, detention, door switch and vehicle speed signal check)
1 CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 2 and ground.

SEL629W

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check the following.
I 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Key switch
I Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
I Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and key switch

2 CHECK IGNITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (ON AND START)

Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminals and ground.

SEL630W

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check the following.
I 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I 7.5A fuse [No. 26, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and fuse

EL-244
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

3 CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL GI

Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 21 and ground.
MA

EC
SEL631W

OK or NG FE
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Check the following. CL
I Park position switch
I Park position switch ground circuit
I Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and park position switch MT

4 CHECK DRIVER DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL AT

Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 9 and ground.

SU
SEL632W

OK or NG
BR
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Check the following.
I Driver door switch
ST
I Driver door switch ground circuit
I Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and driver door switch
RS
5 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
Does speedometer operate normally?
BT
Yes or No
OK © GO TO 6.
HA
NG © Check speedometer and ABS actuator and electric unit circuit. Refer to EL-127.
SC

IDX

EL-245
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

6 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL PULL UP VOLTAGE

1. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2. Check voltage between seat control unit LH terminal 32 and ground.

SEL633W

OK or NG
OK © Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and combination meter.
NG © Repair harness.

EL-246
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 13 =NAEL0369S16
GI
(Seat memory switch check)
1 CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH
MA
1. Disconnect seat memory switch connector.
2. Check continuity between seat memory switch terminals.
EM

FE
SEL634WA

OK or NG
CL
OK © Check the following.
I Ground circuit for seat memory switch MT
I Harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and seat memory switch
NG © Replace seat memory switch.
AT
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 14 NAEL0369S17
(Memory indicator check)
TF
1 CHECK INDICATOR LAMP
Check indicator lamp illumination.
PD
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
AX
NG © Replace seat memory switch (indicator lamp).

2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR INDICATOR LAMP

SU
1. Disconnect seat memory switch connector.
2. Check voltage between seat memory switch terminal and ground. BR

SEL635WA HA
OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between seat control unit LH and seat memory switch SC
NG © Check the following.
I 7.5A fuse [No. 24 located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between fuse and indicator lamp

IDX

EL-247
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location

Component Parts and Harness Connector

Location NAEL0370

SEL256Y

EL-248
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
System Description

System Description NAEL0371

GI
Refer to Owner’s Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND NAEL0371S01
MA
Power is supplied at all times:
I through 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to the stop lamp switch terminal 1, and EM
I through 7.5A fuse (No. 52, located in fuse and fusible link box)
I to the horn relay terminals 1 and 3. LC
When ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied:
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and
EC
I to ASCD control unit terminal 5,
I through 10A fuse [No. 18, located in the fuse block (J/B)] FE
I to park/neutral position relay terminal 1,
I through 10A fuse [No. 8, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to combination meter terminal 66, and
CL
When park/neutral position switch is in the P or N position (A/T models), ground is supplied:
I to park/neutral position relay terminal 2 MT
I through park/neutral position switch and body grounds B55 and B75.
When ASCD main switch is depressed (ON), ground is supplied:
AT
I to ASCD control unit terminal 9
I from ASCD steering switch terminal 4
I to ASCD steering switch terminal 5 TF
I through body grounds M4, M66 and M147
then ASCD control unit holds CRUISE condition and illuminates CRUISE indicator. PD
Ground is supplied:
I from ASCD control unit terminal 15
I to combination meter terminal 46. AX
OPERATION NAEL0371S02
Set Operation NAEL0371S0201
SU
To activate the ASCD, all following conditions must exist.
I Ground is supplied to ASCD control unit terminal 9 (Main switch is in ON position.)
I Power is supplied to ASCD control unit terminal 8 [Brake pedal and clutch pedal are released (M/T mod-
BR
els) and brake pedal is released and A/T selector lever is in other than P and N position (A/T models)].
I Vehicle speed is between 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH). (Signal from combination meter) ST
When the SET/COAST switch is depressed, power is supplied:
I from ASCD steering switch terminal 2
I to ASCD control unit terminal 11. RS
And then ASCD pump is activated to control throttle wire and ASCD control unit supply ground
I to combination meter terminals 51 to illuminate SET indicator. BT
A/T Overdrive Control during Cruise Control Driving (A/T models) NAEL0371S0202
When the vehicle speed is approximately 3 km/h (2 MPH) below set speed, a signal is sent HA
I from ASCD control unit terminal 10
I to TCM (transmission control module) terminal 24.
When this occurs, the TCM (transmission control module) cancels overdrive. SC
After vehicle speed is approximately 1 km/h (1 MPH) below set speed, overdrive is reactivated.
ASCD Shifting Control (A/T models) NAEL0371S0203
During ASCD cruise, ASCD control unit controls A/T shifting to avoid uncomfortable shifting.
This is used to control the signals below.
I Throttle position sensor from ECM
IDX

EL-249
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
System Description (Cont’d)
I A/T shift solenoid valve A
Coast Operation NAEL0371S0204
When the SET/COAST switch is depressed during cruise control driving, ASCD actuator returns the throttle
cable to decrease vehicle set speed until the switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
Accel Operation NAEL0371S0205
When the RESUME/ACCEL switch is depressed, power is supplied
I from ASCD steering switch terminal 3
I to ASCD control unit terminal 24.
If the RESUME/ACCEL switch is depressed during cruise control driving, ASCD actuator pulls the throttle cable
to increase the vehicle speed until the switch is released or vehicle speed is reached to maximum controlled
speed by the system. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
Cancel Operation NAEL0371S0206
When any of following condition exists, cruise operation will be canceled.
I CANCEL switch is depressed. (Power supply to ASCD control unit terminals 11 and 24)
I Brake pedal is depressed. (Power supply to ASCD control unit terminal 23 from stop lamp switch)
I Brake pedal or clutch pedal is depressed (M/T models)/brake pedal is depressed or A/T selector lever is
shifted to P or N position (A/T models). (Power supply to ASCD control unit terminal 8 is interrupted.)
If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operation will be canceled and vehicle
speed memory will be erased.
Resume Operation NAEL0371S0207
When the RESUME/ACCEL switch is depressed after cancel operation other than depressing MAIN switch is
performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must
meet following conditions.
I Brake pedal is released.
I Clutch pedal is released (M/T models).
I A/T selector lever is in other than P and N position (A/T models).
I Vehicle speed is between 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
ASCD PUMP OPERATION NAEL0371S03
The ASCD pump consists of a vacuum motor, an air valve and a release valve. When the ASCD activates,
power is supplied
I from terminal 12 of ASCD control unit
I to ASCD pump terminal 1.
Ground is supplied to vacuum motor, air valve and release valve from ASCD control unit depending on the
operated condition as shown in the below table.
The pump is connected to ASCD actuator by vacuum hose. When the ASCD pump is activated, the ASCD
pump vacuum the diaphragm of ASCD actuator to control throttle cable.
Actuator inner pres-
Air valve (*1) Release valve (*1) Vacuum motor
sure

ASCD not operating Open Open Stopped Atmosphere

Releasing throttle
Open Closed Stopped Vacuum
cable

ASCD operating Holding throttle

Closed Closed Stopped Vacuum (*2)
position

Pulling throttle cable Closed Closed Operated Vacuum

*1: When power and ground is supplied, valve is closed.

*2: Set position held.

EL-250
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Schematic

Schematic NAEL0372
GI

MEL424P
IDX

EL-251
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Wiring Diagram — ASCD —

Wiring Diagram — ASCD — NAEL0373

FIG. 1 NAEL0373S01

MEL048M

EL-252
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Wiring Diagram — ASCD — (Cont’d)
FIG. 2 NAEL0373S02
GI

MEL916O
IDX

EL-253
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Wiring Diagram — ASCD — (Cont’d)
FIG. 3 NAEL0373S03

MEL425P

EL-254
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Wiring Diagram — ASCD — (Cont’d)
FIG. 4 NAEL0373S04
GI

MEL426P
IDX

EL-255
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Fail-safe System

Fail-safe System NAEL0374

DESCRIPTION NAEL0374S01
When the fail-safe system senses a malfunction, it deactivates
ASCD operation. The SET indicator in the combination meter will
then flash.

SEL255W

MALFUNCTION DETECTION CONDITIONS NAEL0374S02

ASCD operation during malfunc-

Detection conditions
tion detection

I ASCD steering (RESUME/ACCEL, CANCEL, SET/COAST) switch is stuck. I ASCD is deactivated.

I Vacuum motor ground circuit or power circuit is open or shorted. I Vehicle speed memory is can-
I Air valve ground circuit or power circuit is open or shorted. celed.
I Release valve ground circuit or power circuit is open or shorted.
I Vehicle speed sensor is faulty.
I ASCD control unit internal circuit is malfunctioning.

I ASCD brake switch or stop lamp switch is faulty. I ASCD is deactivated.

I Vehicle speed memory is not
canceled.

EL-256
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NAEL0375

GI
SYMPTOM CHART NAEL0375S01

PROCEDURE Diagnostic procedure MA

REFERENCE PAGE (EL- ) 258 259 260 261 262 262 264
EM

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK

ASCD BRAKE/STOP LAMP SWITCH CHECK

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR CHECK

ASCD STEERING SWITCH CHECK
EC

ASCD ACTUATOR/PUMP CHECK

ASCD PUMP CIRCUIT CHECK
FAIL-SAFE SYSTEM CHECK
SYMPTOM FE

AT
ASCD cannot be set. (“CRUISE” indica-
X X★3
tor lamp does not ON.)

ASCD cannot be set. (“SET” indicator

TF
X X X
lamp does not blink.)

ASCD cannot be set. (“SET” indicator

X X X X X
PD
lamp blinks.★1)

Vehicle speed does not decrease after

SET/COAST switch has been pressed.
X X AX
Vehicle speed does not return to the set
speed after RESUME/ACCEL switch has X X SU
been pressed.★2

Vehicle speed does not increase after

RESUME/ACCEL switch has been X X BR
pressed.

System is not released after CANCEL

X X ST
switch (steering) has been pressed.

Large difference between set speed and

actual vehicle speed.
X X X RS
Deceleration is greatest immediately
X X X
after ASCD has been set. BT
★1: It indicates that system is in fail-safe. After completing diagnostic procedures, perform “FAIL-SAFE SYSTEM CHECK” (EL-258) to
verify repairs.
★2: If vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) after system has been released, pressing RESUME/ACCEL switch returns vehicle HA
speed to the set speed previously achieved. However, doing so when the ASCD main switch is turned to “OFF”, vehicle speed will not
return to the set speed since the memory is canceled.
★3: Check only main switch built-in steering switch. SC

IDX

EL-257
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
FAIL-SAFE SYSTEM CHECK =NAEL0375S02
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
2. Turn ASCD main switch to ON and check if the SET indicator
blinks.
If the indicator lamp blinks, check the following.
I ASCD steering switch. Refer to EL-261.

SEL417V

3. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and push
SET/COAST switch.
If the indicator lamp blinks, check the following.
I Vehicle speed signal. Refer to EL-262.
I ASCD pump circuit. Refer to EL-262.
I Replace control unit.

SEL767P

4. Depress brake pedal slowly (brake pedal should be depressed

more than 5 seconds).
If the indicator lamp blinks, check the following.
I ASCD brake/stop lamp switch. Refer to EL-260.

SAT797A

5. END. (System is OK.)

EL-258
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK =NAEL0375S03 GI
1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ASCD CONTROL UNIT
1. Disconnect ASCD control unit harness connector. MA
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ASCD control unit harness connector terminal 5 and ground.
EM

FE
SEL256WB
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-254. CL
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Check the following.
I 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
MT
I Harness for open or short between ASCD control unit and fuse
AT
2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR ASCD CONTROL UNIT
Check continuity between ASCD control unit harness connector terminal 17 and body ground. TF

SEL257WB
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-254. BR
Yes © Power supply and ground circuit is OK.
No © Repair harness. ST

IDX

EL-259
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
ASCD BRAKE/STOP LAMP SWITCH CHECK =NAEL0375S04

1 CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect ASCD control unit harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between ASCD control unit harness connector M3 terminal 8 and ground.

SEL258WF

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check the following.
I ASCD brake switch
Refer to “Electrical Component Inspection” (EL-266).
I ASCD clutch switch (M/T models)
Refer to “Electrical Component Inspection” (EL-266).
I Park/neutral position switch (A/T models)
Refer to “Electrical Component Inspection” (EL-266).
I Park/neutral position relay (A/T models)
I Harness for open or short

2 CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect ASCD control unit harness connector.
2. Check voltage between ASCD control unit harness connector terminal 23 and ground.

SEL259WB
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-253.
OK or NG
OK © ASCD brake/stop lamp switch is OK.
NG © Check the following.
I 10A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between ASCD control unit and stop lamp switch
I Harness for open or short between fuse and stop lamp switch
I Stop lamp switch
Refer to “Electrical Component Inspection” (EL-266).

EL-260
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
ASCD STEERING SWITCH CHECK =NAEL0375S05
GI
1 CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR ASCD CONTROL UNIT
Check voltage between ASCD control unit harness connector terminals and ground. MA

SEL260WC FE
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-253.
OK or NG
CL
OK © ASCD steering switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.
MT
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR ASCD STEERING SWITCH
AT
Does horn work?
Yes © GO TO 3.
No © Check the following.
TF
I 7.5A fuse (No. 52, located in the relay box)
I Horn relay
I Horn circuit
PD

3 CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH AX

1. Disconnect ASCD steering switch.
2. Check continuity between ASCD steering switch harness connector Z30 terminals by pushing each switch. SU

SEL495Y
BT
OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between ASCD steering switch and ASCD control unit.
HA
NG © Replace ASCD steering switch.

IDX

EL-261
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CHECK =NAEL0375S06

1 CHECK SPEEDOMETER OPERATION

Does speedometer operate normally?

Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Check speedometer and ABS actuator and electric unit circuit. Refer to wiring diagram in
EL-255.

2 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED INPUT

1. Apply wheel chocks and jack up drive wheel.
2. Disconnect ASCD control unit harness connector.
3. Check voltage between control unit terminal 22 and ground with turning drive wheel slowly by hand.

SEL263WB
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-254.
Yes © Vehicle speed signal is OK.
No © Check harness for open or short between ASCD control unit terminal 22 and combination
meter terminal 13.

ASCD PUMP CIRCUIT CHECK NAEL0375S07

1 CHECK ASCD PUMP

1. Disconnect ASCD pump connector.
2. Measure resistance between ASCD pump terminals 1 and 2, 3, 4.

SEL262WB
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-254.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace ASCD pump.

EL-262
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

2 CHECK ASCD PUMP CIRCUIT GI

1. Disconnect ASCD control unit harness connector.
2. Check harness for open or short between ASCD control unit and ASCD pump. MA

SEL269WB
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
CL
NG © Repair harness.

3 CHECK ASCD PUMP POWER SUPPLY

MT
1. Jack-up the drive wheels.
2. Maintain the conditions below. AT
I Vehicle speed is more than 40 km/h (25 MPH).
I Main switch (CRUISE lamp) is ON.
I Set/coast switch (SET lamp) is ON. TF
Check voltage between ASCD control unit harness connector terminal 12 and ground.

SEL381WB
BR
OK or NG
OK © ASCD pump power supply is OK.
ST
NG © Replace ASCD control unit.
RS

IDX

EL-263
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
ASCD ACTUATOR/PUMP CHECK =NAEL0375S08

1 CHECK VACUUM HOSE

Check vacuum hose (between ASCD actuator and ASCD pump) for breakage, cracks or fracture.

MEL402G

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair or replace hose.

2 CHECK ASCD WIRE

Check wire for improper installation, rust formation or breaks.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair or replace wire. Refer to “ASCD Wire Adjustment” (EL-267).

3 CHECK ASCD ACTUATOR

1. Disconnect vacuum hose from ASCD actuator.
2. Connect the hose of hand vacuum pump to ASCD actuator.

SEL264W

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Replace ASCD actuator.

EL-264
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

4 CHECK ASCD PUMP GI

1. Disconnect vacuum hose from ASCD pump and ASCD pump connector.
2. If necessary remove ASCD pump. MA
3. Connect vacuum gauge to ASCD pump.
4. Apply 12V direct current to ASCD pump and check operation.
EM

FE
SEL265WB

OK or NG CL
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © Replace ASCD pump. MT

IDX

EL-265
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Electrical Component Inspection

Electrical Component Inspection =NAEL0376

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH AND STOP LAMP SWITCHNAEL0376S01
Continuity
Condition ASCD brake
Stop lamp switch
switch

When brake pedal is depressed No Yes

When brake pedal is released Yes No

SEL302X Check each switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to BR-14,
“BRAKE PEDAL AND BRACKET”.

PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH (FOR A/T

MODELS) NAEL0376S02

Continuity
A/T selector lever position
Between terminals 1 and 2

“P” Yes

“N” Yes

Except “P” and “N” No

SEL303X

ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH (FOR M/T MODELS) NAEL0376S03

Condition Continuity

When clutch pedal is depressed No

When clutch pedal is released Yes

SEL635X

EL-266
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
ASCD Wire Adjustment

ASCD Wire Adjustment =NAEL0377

MEL383K MT

CAUTION:
I Be careful not to twist ASCD wire when removing it. AT
I Do not tense ASCD wire excessively during adjustment.
Adjust the tension of ASCD wire in the following manner. TF
1. Loosen lock nut and adjusting nut.
2. Make sure that accelerator wire is properly adjusted. Refer to
FE-3, “ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM”. PD
3. Tighten adjusting nut just until throttle drum starts to move.
4. Loosen adjusting nut again 1/2 to 1 turn. AX
5. Tighten lock nut.

IDX

EL-267
POWER WINDOW
System Description

System Description NAEL0378

Power is supplied at all times
I from 40A fusible link (letter f, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
I to circuit breaker terminal 1
I through circuit breaker terminal 2
I to power window relay terminal 3,
I to front power window main switch terminal 4, and
I to front power window switch RH terminal 6.
With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 27
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 46 and
I to power window relay terminal 2.
Ground is supplied to power window relay terminal 1
I through body grounds M4, M66 and M147.
The power window relay is energized and power is supplied
I through power window relay terminal 5
I to front power window main switch terminal 11,
I to front power window switch RH terminal 13 and
I to rear power window switch LH and RH terminals 5.
MANUAL OPERATION NAEL0378S01
Front Door LH NAEL0378S0101
Ground is supplied
I to front power window main switch terminal 5
I through body grounds M77 and M111.
WINDOW UP
When the front LH switch in the front power window main switch is pressed in the up position, power is sup-
plied
I to front power window regulator LH terminal 1
I through front power window main switch terminal 2.
Ground is supplied
I to front power window regulator LH terminal 3
I through front power window main switch terminal 3.
Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released.
WINDOW DOWN
When the LH switch in the front power window main switch is pressed in the down position, power is supplied
I to front power window regulator LH terminal 3
I through front power window main switch terminal 3.
Ground is supplied
I to front power window regulator LH terminal 1
I through front power window main switch terminal 2.
Then, the motor lowers the window until the switch is released.
Front Door RH NAEL0378S0102
Ground is supplied
I to front power window main switch terminal 5
I through body grounds M77 and M111.
NOTE:
Numbers in parentheses are terminal numbers, when power window switch is pressed in the UP and DOWN
positions respectively.
FRONT POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH OPERATION
When front RH switch in the front power window main switch is pressed UP or DOWN, a signal is supplied

EL-268
POWER WINDOW
System Description (Cont’d)
I through front power window main switch terminal 8 GI
I to front power window switch RH terminal 11.
The subsequent operation is the same as the front power window switch RH operation.
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH OPERATION MA
Power is supplied
I through front power window switch RH (5, 4)
EM
I to front power window regulator RH (1, 3).
Ground is supplied
I to front power window regulator RH (3, 1) LC
I through front power window switch RH (4, 5)
I to front power window switch RH terminal 12 EC
I through front power window main switch terminal 1.
Then, the motor raises or lowers the window until the switch is released.
FE
Rear Door LH NAEL0378S0103
Ground is supplied
I to front power window main switch terminal 5 CL
I through body grounds the M77 and M111.
NOTE: MT
Numbers in parentheses are terminal numbers, when the power window switch is pressed in the UP and
DOWN positions.
FRONT POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH OPERATION AT
Power is supplied
I through front power window main switch terminal (13, 12)
I to rear power window switch LH terminal (3, 4) TF
The subsequent operation is the same as the rear power window switch LH operation.
REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH PD
Power is supplied
I through rear power window switch LH (1, 2)
I to rear power window regulator LH (1, 2) AX
Ground is supplied
I to rear power window regulator LH (2, 1)
SU
I through rear power window switch LH (2, 1)
I to rear power window switch LH terminal (4, 3)
I through front power window main switch terminal (12, 13) BR
Then, the motor raises or lowers the window until the switch is released.
Rear Door RH NAEL0378S0104
ST
Rear door RH windows will rise and lower in the same manner as the rear door LH window.
AUTO OPERATION NAEL0378S02
RS
The power window AUTO feature enables the driver or front passenger to open or close the driver’s and front
passenger’s window without holding the window switch in the up or down position.
The AUTO feature only operates on the driver’s and front passenger’s window upward and downward move- BT
ment.
POWER WINDOW LOCK NAEL0378S03 HA
The power window lock is designed to lock operation of all windows except for driver’s door window.
When the lock switch is pressed to lock position, the ground of the front and rear power window switches, in
the power window main switch, is disconnected. This prevents the power window motors from operating. SC
RETAINED POWER OPERATION NAEL0378S04
When the ignition switch is turned to OFF position from ON or START position, power is supplied for 45 sec-
onds
I to power window relay terminal 2
I from smart entrance control unit terminal 46. IDX

EL-269
POWER WINDOW
System Description (Cont’d)
Ground is always supplied
I to power window relay terminal 1
I through body grounds M4, M66 and M147.
When power and ground are supplied, the power window relay continues to be energized, and the power win-
dow can be operated.
The retained power operation is canceled when the driver or passenger side door is opened.
RAP signal’s period can be changed by CONSULT-II. (EL-278)
INTERRUPTION DETECTION FUNCTION NAEL0378S05
Front power window main switch and front power window switch RH monitor the power window regulator motor
operation and the power window position (full closed or other) for driver’s and passenger’s power window by
the signals from encoder and limit switch in front power window regulator LH or RH.
When front power window main switch or front power window switch RH detects interruption during the fol-
lowing close operation in the driver’s or front passenger’s side door,
I automatic close operation when ignition switch is in the “ON” position
I automatic close operation during retained power operation
front power window main switch or front power window switch RH controls driver’s or front passenger’s power
window regulator motor for open and the power window will be lowered about 150 mm (5.91 in).
POWER WINDOW OPENED/CLOSED OPERATION WITH KEY CYLINDER NAEL0378S06
When ignition key switch is OFF, front power window can be opened or closed by turning the front door key
cylinder LH to UNLOCK/LOCK position.
I Power window can be opened as the door key cylinder is kept fully turning to the UNLOCK position.
I Power window can be closed as the door key cylinder is kept fully turning to the LOCK position.
The power window opening stops when the following operations are carried out:
I While performing open/close the window, power window is stopped at the position as the door key cylin-
der is placed on Neutral.
I When the ignition switch is turned ON while the power window opening is operated.

EL-270
POWER WINDOW
Schematic

Schematic NAEL0379
GI

MEL427P
IDX

EL-271
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —

Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — NAEL0380

MEL410O

EL-272
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (Cont’d)

MEL428P

IDX

EL-273
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (Cont’d)

MEL516P

EL-274
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (Cont’d)

MEL429P

IDX

EL-275
POWER WINDOW
Wiring Diagram — WINDOW — (Cont’d)

MEL517P

EL-276
POWER WINDOW
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure

CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure NAEL0381

GI
“RETAINED PWR” NAEL0381S01
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
MA
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to the data link connector.

LC
SEL331X

3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. EC

4. Touch “START”.
FE

MT
PBR455D
AT
5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.

SEL398Y SU
6. Touch “RETAINED PWR”.
BR

SEL401Y BT
7. Select diagnosis mode.
“DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT” HA
are available.

IDX
SEL400Y

EL-277
POWER WINDOW
CONSULT-II Application Items

CONSULT-II Application Items NAEL0382

“RETAINED PWR” NAEL0382S01
Data Monitor NAEL0382S0101

Monitored Item Description

IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.

DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.

DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.

Active Test NAEL0382S0102

Test Item Description

RETAINED PWR This test is able to supply RAP signal (power) from smart entrance control unit to power window
system, power sunroof system and headlamp battery saver control unit. Those systems can be
operated when turning on “RETAINED PWR” on CONSULT-II screen even if the ignition switch is
tuned OFF.
NOTE:
During this test, CONSULT-II can be operated with ignition switch in “OFF” position.
“RETAINED PWR” should be turned “ON” or “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen when ignition
switch is ON. Then turn ignition switch OFF to check retained power operation. CON-
SULT-II might be stuck if “RETAINED PWR” is turned “ON” or “OFF” on CONSULT-II screen
when ignition switch is OFF.

Work Support NAEL0382S0103

Work Item Description

RETAINED PWR SET Rap signal’s power supply period can be changed by mode setting. Selects rap signal’s power
supply period between three steps.
I MODE 1 (45 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF)/MODE 3 (2 min.)

Trouble Diagnoses NAEL0383

Symptom Possible cause Repair order

None of the power windows can be 1. 7.5A fuse, 40A fusible link 1. Check 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in fuse block
operated using any switch. 2. M145 circuit breaker (J/B)], 40A fusible link (letter f, located in fuse and
3. Power window relay fusible link box).
4. M145 circuit breaker circuit 2. Check M145 circuit breaker.
5. Power window relay circuit 3. Check power window relay.
6. Ground circuit 4. Check the following.
7. Power window main switch a. Harness between M145 circuit breaker and 40A fus-
ible link
b. Harness between M145 circuit breaker and front
power window main switch
5. Check the following.
a. Harness between 7.5A fuse and power window relay
b. Harness between M145 circuit breaker and power
window relay
6. Check the following.
a. Ground circuit of power window main switch terminal
5
b. Power window relay ground circuit
7. Check power window main switch.

EL-278
POWER WINDOW
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

Symptom Possible cause Repair order GI

Driver side power window cannot 1. Driver side power window regu- 1. Check harness between power window main switch
be operated but other windows can lator circuit and driver side power window regulator for open or MA
be operated. 2. Driver side power window regu- short circuit.
lator 2. Check driver side power window regulator.
3. Power window main switch 3. Check power window main switch.
EM
Passenger side power window can- 1. Power supply for front power 1. Check power supply for front power window switch
not be operated but other window window switch RH RH terminals 6 and 13.
can be operated. 2. Front power window switch RH 2. Check front power window switch RH ground circuit. LC
ground circuit 3. Check harness between front power window switch
3. Front power window switch RH RH and power window main switch.
circuit 4. Check harness between front power window switch EC
4. Front power window regulator RH and front power window regulator RH for open
RH circuit or short circuit.
5. Front power window regulator 5. Check front power window regulator RH. FE
RH 6. Check front power window main switch.
6. Front power window main 7. Check front power window switch RH.
switch
7. Front power window switch RH CL
One or more rear power windows 1. Rear power window switches 1. Check rear power window switches.
except front window cannot be 2. Rear power window regulators 2. Check rear power window regulator. MT
operated. 3. Power window main switch 3. Check power window main switch.
4. Rear power window circuit 4. Check the following.
a. Harness between the rear power window switches AT
(LH and RH) terminal 5 and power window relay
terminal 5
b. Harnesses between power window main switch and
rear power window switches for open/short circuit
TF
c. Harnesses between rear power window switches
and rear power window regulator for open/short cir-
cuit PD
Power windows except driver’s 1. Power window main switch 1. Check power window main switch.
side window cannot be operated AX
using power window main switch
but can be operated by power win-
dow switches.
SU
Driver side power window auto- 1. Power window main switch 1. Check power window main switch.
matic operation does not function 2. Encoder and limit switch 2. Check encoder and limit switch. (EL-281)
properly. BR
Front passenger side power win- 1. Front power window switch RH 1. Check front power window switch RH.
dow automatic operation does not 2. Encoder and limit switch 2. Check encoder and limit switch. (EL-281)
function properly. ST

IDX

EL-279
POWER WINDOW
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

Symptom Possible cause Repair order

Retained power operation does not 1. RAP signal circuit 1. Check RAP signal.
operate properly. 2. Driver or passenger side door a. (With CONSULT-II)
switch circuit I Check RAP signal with CONSULT-II.
3. Smart entrance control unit Use “WORK SUPPORT” mode, “RETAINED PWR” in
“SMART ENTRANCE”. (Refer to EL-278.)
I Check RAP signal with CONSULT-II.
Use “ACTIVE TEST” mode, “RETAINED PWR” in
“SMART ENTRANCE”.
(Refer to EL-277.)
If NG, go to the step b. below.
b. Verify 12 positive voltage from smart entrance con-
trol unit terminal 46 is present at terminal 2 of power
window relay:
I Within 45 seconds after ignition switch turns off.*1
I When front door LH and RH is closed.
2. Check the following.
a. Harness between smart entrance control unit and
driver or passenger side door switch for short circuit
b. Driver or passenger side door switch ground circuit
c. Driver or passenger side door switch
3. Check smart entrance control unit. (EL-378)

Passenger side power window can- 1. Front power window main 1. Check power window main switch. (EL-283)
not be operated using power win- switch
dow main switch but can be oper-
ated by passenger side power win-
dow switch.

Rear LH power window cannot be 1. Front power window main 1. Check power window main switch. (EL-283)
operated using power window main switch
switch but can be operated by rear
LH power window switch.

Rear RH power window cannot be 1. Front power window main 1. Check power window main switch. (EL-283)
operated using power window main switch
switch but can be operated by rear
RH power window switch.

*1: RAP signal’s period can be changed by CONSULT-II. (EL-278)

EL-280
POWER WINDOW
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
ENCODER AND LIMIT SWITCH CHECK =NAEL0383S01
GI
1 CHECK DOOR WINDOW SLIDE MECHANISM
Check the following. MA
I Obstacles in window, glass molding, etc.
I Worn or deformed glass molding
I Door sash tilted too far inward or outward EM
I Door window regulator
OK or NG
LC
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Remove obstacles or repair door window slide mechanism.
EC
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO LIMIT SWITCH
1. Disconnect front power window regulator LH or RH harness connector. FE
2. Check voltage between front power window main switch terminal 15 or front power window switch RH terminal 16 and
ground.
CL

TF
SEL725WA

OK or NG
PD
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace power window main switch or front power window switch RH.
AX

3 CHECK LIMIT SWITCH OPERATION SU

1. Connect front power window regulator LH or RH harness connector.
2. Check voltage between front power window main switch terminal 15 or front power window switch RH terminal 16 and
ground during power window closing operation.
BR

SEL726WA
HA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. SC
NG © GO TO 4.

IDX

EL-281
POWER WINDOW
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

4 RESET LIMIT SWITCH

Reset limit switch. Refer to BT-20, “Front Door Glass Limit Switch Reset”. Then check voltage between front power win-
dow main switch terminal 15 or front power window switch RH terminal 16 and ground during power window closing
operation at least ten times.

SEL726WA

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace power window regulator motor.

5 CHECK ENCODER
Measure voltage between front power window main switch terminal 14 or front power window switch RH terminal 19 and
ground with oscilloscope when power window is in automatic closing operation.

SEL727WA

OK or NG
OK © Replace power window main switch.
NG © Replace power window regulator motor.

EL-282
POWER WINDOW
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
MAIN SWITCH OPERATION CHECK NAEL0383S02
GI
Passenger Side Operation NAEL0383S0201

1 CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL MA

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
2. Turn front power window main switch to ON (UP or DOWN). EM
3. Check signal between front power window main switch harness connector D6 terminal 8 (Y) and ground when power
window is in open or close operation. (Use “SIMPLE OSCILLOSCOPE” in “SUB MODE” with CONSULT-II.)
LC

CL
SEL496Y
MT
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
2. Turn front power window main switch to ON (UP or DOWN).
AT
3. Check signal between front power window main switch harness connector D6 terminal 8 (Y) and ground when power
window is in open or close operation.
TF

SU
SEL497Y
BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace front power window main switch.
ST

IDX

EL-283
POWER WINDOW
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

2 CHECK SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Check continuity between front power window switch harness connector D6 terminal 8 (Y) and front power window
switch harness connector D36 RH terminal 11 (Y).

SEL163Y

Yes or No
Yes © INSPECTION END
No © Repair harness or connectors.

EL-284
POWER WINDOW
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Rear LH Side Window Operation =NAEL0383S0202
GI
1 CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position. MA
2. Check voltage between front power window main switch harness connector D6 terminal 12 or 13 and ground when rear
power window LH side is in open or close operation.
EM

FE
SEL164Y

OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace front power window main switch. MT

2 CHECK SIGNAL CIRCUIT AT

1. Check continuity between front power window main switch harness connector D6 terminal 12 and rear power window
switch LH harness connector D52 terminal 4.
2. Check continuity between front power window main switch harness connector D6 terminal 13 and rear power window TF
switch LH harness connector D52 terminal 3.

BR
SEL165Y

Yes or No
ST
Yes © INSPECTION END
No © Repair harness or connectors.
RS

IDX

EL-285
POWER WINDOW
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Rear RH Side Window Operation =NAEL0383S0203

1 CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH OUTPUT

1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
2. Check voltage between front power window main switch harness connector D6 terminal 9 or 10 and ground when rear
power window RH side is in open or close operation.

SEL166Y

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace front power window main switch.

2 CHECK SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Check continuity between front power window main switch harness connector D6 terminal 9 and rear power window
switch RH harness connector D72 terminal 3.
2. Check continuity between front power window main switch harness connector D6 terminal 10 and rear power window
switch RH harness connector D72 terminal 4.

SEL167Y

Yes or No
Yes © INSPECTION END
No © Repair harness or connectors.

EL-286
POWER DOOR LOCK
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location

Component Parts and Harness Connector GI

Location NAEL0384

SEL065WB
BT
System Description NAEL0385
OPERATION HA
NAEL0385S01

I The lock/unlock switch (LH and RH) on door trim can lock and unlock all doors.
I With the door key inserted in the key cylinder on front LH or back door, turning it to “LOCK”, will lock all SC
doors; turning it to “UNLOCK” once unlocks the corresponding door; turning it to “UNLOCK” again within
5 seconds after the first unlock operation unlocks all of the other doors. (Signals from door key cylinder
switch)
I If the ignition key is in the ignition key cylinder and one or more of doors are open, setting the lock/unlock
switch to “LOCK” locks the doors once but then immediately unlock them. (Combination signals from key
switch and door switches) - (KEY REMINDER DOOR SYSTEM) IDX

EL-287
POWER DOOR LOCK
Schematic

Schematic NAEL0386

MEL431P

EL-288
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —

Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — NAEL0387

GI
FIG. 1 NAEL0387S01

MEL388P
IDX

EL-289
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 2 NAEL0387S02

MEL432P

EL-290
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 3 NAEL0387S03
GI

MEL433P
IDX

EL-291
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 4 NAEL0387S04

MEL434P

EL-292
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 5 NAEL0387S05
GI

MEL852L
IDX

EL-293
POWER DOOR LOCK
Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK — (Cont’d)
FIG. 6 NAEL0387S06

MEL435P

EL-294
POWER DOOR LOCK
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure

CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure =NAEL0388

GI
“DOOR LOCK” NAEL0388S01
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
MA
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to the data link connector.

LC
SEL331X

3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. EC

4. Turn “START”.
FE

MT
PBR455D
AT
5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.

SEL398Y SU
6. Touch “DOOR LOCK”.
BR

SEL023X BT
7. Select diagnosis mode.
“DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT” HA
are available.

IDX
SEL274W

EL-295
POWER DOOR LOCK
CONSULT-II Application Items

CONSULT-II Application Items NAEL0389

“DOOR LOCK” NAEL0389S01
Data Monitor NAEL0389S0101

Monitored Item Description

KEY ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.

LOCK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH.

DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door switch (Rear).

UNLK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH.

KEY CYL LK-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key cylinder.

KEY CYL UN-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from key cylinder.

LK BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob.

UN BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.

IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch.

DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.

DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.

Active Test NAEL0389S0102

Test Item Description

This test is able to check all door lock actuators lock operation. These actuators lock when
ALL D/LK MTR
“ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.

This test is able to check front door lock actuator LH unlock operation. The actuator unlocks
DR D/UN MTR
when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.

This test is able to check door lock actuators (except front door lock actuator LH) unlock opera-
NON DR D/UN
tion. These actuators unlock when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.

Work Support NAEL0389S0103

Work Item Description

DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET Select unlock mode can be changed in this mode. Selects ON-OFF of select unlock mode.

Key reminder door mode can be changed in this mode. Selects ON-OFF of key reminder door
ANTI-LOCK OUT SET
mode.

EL-296
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NAEL0390

GI
SYMPTOM CHART NAEL0390S01

REFERENCE PAGE (EL- ) 298 299 301 302 303 305 307 MA

MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK

FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK

BACK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK

DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK

DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK

KEY SWITCH (INSERT) CHECK
SYMPTOM
FE

DOOR SWITCH CHECK

AT
Key reminder door system does not operate
X X X X
properly.
TF
Specific door lock actuator does not operate. X X

Power door lock does not operate with door

lock and unlock switch (LH and RH) on door X X
PD
trim.

Power door lock does not operate with front

X X
AX
door key cylinder operation.

Power door lock does not operate with back

door key cylinder operation.
X X SU

IDX

EL-297
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
=NAEL0390S02
Main Power Supply Circuit Check NAEL0390S0201

Terminals Ignition switch

(+)

Terminal (–) OFF ACC ON

Connector
(Wire color)

49 (G/R) Battery Battery Battery

M123 Ground
51 (W/R) voltage voltage voltage
SEL007YA

Ground Circuit Check NAEL0390S0202

Terminals

(+)
Continuity
Terminal (–)
Connector
(Wire color)

M122 43 (B)
Ground Yes
M123 64 (B)

SEL008Y

EL-298
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DOOR SWITCH CHECK =NAEL0390S03
GI
1 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II MA
Check door switches (“DOOR SW-DR”, “DOOR SW-AS”, “DOOR SW-RR”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

FE
SEL009Y

Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminals 1 (G/OR), 2 (Y) or 3 (R/L) and CL
ground.

PD
SEL010Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-289.
AX
OK or NG
OK © Door switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.
SU

IDX

EL-299
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH

1. Disconnect door switch connector.
2. Check the following.
I Continuity between front door switch harness connector B9 (LH) or B68 (RH) terminals 1 and 2
I Continuity between front door switch harness connector B9 (LH) or B68 (RH) terminal and ground
I Continuity between back door switch harness connector D208 terminals 1 and 2
I Continuity between rear door switch harness connector B18 (LH) or B71 (RH) terminal 1 and ground

SEL287Y

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Door switches ground circuit (Front or back door) or rear door switches ground condi-
tion
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door switch
NG © Replace door switch.

EL-300
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
KEY SWITCH (INSERT) CHECK =NAEL0390S04
GI
1 CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II MA
Check key switch (“KEY ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

FE
SEL315W

Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 25 (W/R) and ground. CL

SEL011Y PD
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-290.
OK or NG AX
OK © Key switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.
SU
2 CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)
BR
Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2.

SEL308X
HA
OK or NG
OK © Check the following. SC
I 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key switch
NG © Replace key switch.
IDX

EL-301
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK =NAEL0390S05

1 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check door lock/unlock switch (“LOCK SW DR/AS”/“UNLK SW DR/AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

SEL341W

Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove key from ignition switch.
2. Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 33 (L) and ground with oscillo-
scope when door lock/unlock switch is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
3. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec. just after door lock/unlock
switch is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.

SEL487Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-294.
OK or NG
OK © Door lock/unlock switch is OK.
NG © Check the following.
I Ground circuit for each front power window switch
I Harness for open or short between each front power window switch and smart
entrance control unit connector
If above systems are normal, replace the front power window switch.

EL-302
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK =NAEL0390S06
GI
1 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL)
With CONSULT-II MA
Check front door key cylinder switch (“KEY CYL LK-SW”/“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.
EM

FE
SEL342W

Without CONSULT-II CL
1. Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 33 (L) and ground with oscillo-
scope when key inserted in front key cylinder is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
2. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec. just after key is turned “LOCK” MT
or “UNLOCK”.

AX
SEL488Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-294.
SU
OK or NG
OK © Door key cylinder switch LH is OK.
BR
NG © GO TO 2.

IDX

EL-303
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH

1. Disconnect door key cylinder switch connector.
2. Check continuity between door key cylinder switch terminals.

SEL313X

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Door key cylinder switch LH ground circuit
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and front power win-
dow main switch
I Harness for open or short between front power window main switch and door key cyl-
inder switch LH
NG © Replace door key cylinder switch LH.

EL-304
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
BACK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK =NAEL0390S07
GI
1 CHECK BACK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL)
With CONSULT-II MA
Check back door key cylinder switch (“KEY CYL LK-SW”/“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.
EM

FE
SEL342WB

Without CONSULT-II CL
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminals 10 (LG) or 11 (Y) and ground.

SU
SEL286Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-291. BR
OK or NG
OK © Back door key cylinder switch is OK. ST
NG © GO TO 2.

IDX

EL-305
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

2 CHECK BACK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH

1. Disconnect back door key cylinder switch connector.
2. Check continuity between back door key cylinder switch terminals.

SEL315X

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Back door key cylinder switch ground circuit
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and back door key cyl-
inder switch
NG © Replace back door key cylinder switch.

EL-306
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CHECK =NAEL0390S08
GI
1 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR OPERATION
With CONSULT-II MA
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “DOOR LOCK” with CONSULT-II.
2. Select “ALL D/LK MTR” and touch “ON”.
3. Then, select “DR D/UN MTR” and touch “ON”. EM
4. Select “NON DR D/UN” and touch “ON”.

CL
SEL343W
NOTE:
If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this procedure and go to the next step. MT
OK or NG
OK © Door lock actuator is OK. AT
NG © GO TO 2.

IDX

EL-307
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT

I Door lock actuator front LH
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M145 terminal 54 (GY), 55 (W/B) and ground.

SEL014Y
I Door lock actuator front RH and rear
Chcek voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M145 terminal 54 (GY), 56 (G/Y) and ground.

SEL015Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-292.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace smart entrance control unit. (Before replacing smart entrance control unit, per-
form “DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK”.)

EL-308
POWER DOOR LOCK
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

3 CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR GI

1. Disconnect door lock actuator connector.
2. Apply 12V direct current to door lock actuator and check operation. MA

SEL318X
FE

AT
SEL319X
TF
OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit connector and door
lock actuator. PD
NG © Replace door lock actuator.
AX

IDX

EL-309
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location

Component Parts and Harness Connector

Location NAEL0391

SEL290Y

System Description NAEL0392

INPUTS NAEL0392S01
Power is supplied at all times
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 49 and
I to key switch terminal 2
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
When the key switch is ON (ignition key is inserted in key cylinder), power is supplied
I through key switch terminal 1
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 25.
When the front door switch LH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 1
I through front door switch LH terminal 1
I to front door switch LH terminal 2
I through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
When the front door switch RH is ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 2
I through front door switch RH terminal 1
I to front door switch RH terminal 2
I through body grounds B55 and B75.
When the all doors switches are ON (door is OPEN), ground is supplied

EL-310
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 3 GI
I through front door switches terminal 3
I to front door switches case grounds, and
I through rear door switches terminal 1 MA
I to rear door switchs case grounds, and
I through back door switch terminal 2 EM
I to back door switch terminal 1
I through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
When lock/unlock switch LH is LOCK, ground is supplied LC
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 5
I through lock/unlock switch LH terminal 6, and EC
I through body grounds M77 and M111.
When lock/unlock switch LH is UNLOCK, ground is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 4
FE
I through lock/unlock switch LH terminal 19, and
I through body grounds M77 and M111. CL
Remote controller signal is inputted to smart entrance control unit (The antenna of the system is combined
with smart entrance control unit).
MT
OPERATION NAEL0392S02
The remote keyless entry system controls operation of the
I power door lock AT
I auto door lock
I interior lamp TF
I panic alarm
I hazard and horn reminder
I power window opener PD
OPERATED PROCEDURE NAEL0392S03
Power Door Lock Operation AX
NAEL0392S0301
Smart entrance control unit receives a LOCK signal from keyfob. Smart entrance control unit locks all doors
with input of LOCK signal from keyfob.
When an UNLOCK signal is sent from keyfob once, driver’s door will be unlocked. SU
Then, if an UNLOCK signal is sent from keyfob again within 5 seconds, all other door will be unlocked.
Select unlock mode can be changed by CONSULT-II (EL-320).
BR
Auto Door Lock Operation NAEL0392S0308
Auto lock function signal is sent for operation when any of the following signals are not sent within 5 minutes
after the unlock signal is sent from the keyfob: ST
I when door switch is turned ON for open.
I when the ignition switch is turned ON. RS
I when the lock signal is sent from the keyfob.
Auto door lock mode can be changed by CONSULT-II (EL-320).
BT
Hazard and Horn Reminder NAEL0392S0302
Power is supplied at all times
I to horn relay terminals 1 and 3 HA
I through 7.5A fuse (No. 52, located in the fusible link and fuse box), and
I to horn relay terminal 6 SC
I through 10A fuse (No. 54, located in the fusible link and fuse box)
When smart entrance control unit receives LOCK or UNLOCK signal from remote controller with all doors
closed, ground is supplied
I to horn relay terminal 2
I through smart entrance control unit terminal 42, and
IDX
I to smart entrance control unit terminals 47 and 48 from hazard warning lamp system.

EL-311
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
Horn relay are now energized, and hazard warning lamp flashes and horn sounds as a reminder.
The hazard and horn reminder has C mode (horn chirp mode) and S mode (non-horn chirp mode).
Operating function of hazard and horn reminder
Lock Unlock

Hazard warning lamp Hazard warning lamp

Horn sound Horn sound
flash flash

C MODE Twice Once Once —

S MODE Twice — — —

MODE 3 — — — —

MODE 4 Twice — Once —

MODE 5 Twice Once — —

MODE 6 — Once Once —

How to change hazard and horn reminder mode

With CONSULT-II
Hazard and horn reminder can be changed by CONSULT-II (EL-320).
Without CONSULT-II
When LOCK and UNLOCK signals are sent from the keyfob for more than 2 seconds at the same time, the
hazard and horn reminder mode is changed and hazard warning lamp flashes and horn sounds as follows:

SEL153WA

NOTE:
Reminder mode setting cannot be changed without CONSULT-II for MODES 3,4, 5, and 6. However, C and
S MODES can be changed without CONSULT-II.
Interior Lamp Operation NAEL0392S0303
When the following input signals are both supplied:
I door switch CLOSED (when all the doors are closed);
I driver’s door LOCKED;
remote keyless entry system turns on interior lamp and keyhole illumination (for 30 seconds) with input of
UNLOCK signal from keyfob.
For detailed description, refer to “INTERIOR, STEP, SPOT, VANITY MIRROR AND TRUNK ROOM LAMPS”
(EL-92).
Panic Alarm Operation NAEL0392S0304
When key switch is OFF (when ignition key is not inserted in key cylinder), remote keyless entry system turns
horn and headlamp on and off intermittently with input of PANIC ALARM signal from keyfob.
The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when smart entrance control unit receives any signal
from keyfob.
For detailed description, refer to “VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM” (EL-343).
The panic alarm button’s pressing time on keyfob can be changed with CONSULT-II (EL-320).
Power Window Opener Operation NAEL0392S0307
The front power windows open when the unlock button on keyfob is activated and kept pressed for more than
3 seconds with the ignition key OFF. The windows keep opening if the unlock button is continuously pressed.
The power window opening stops when the following operations are carried out:
EL-312
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
I When the unlock button is kept pressed more than 15 seconds. GI
I When the ignition switch is turned ON while the power window opening is operated.
I When the unlock button is released.
The unlock button’s pressing time can be changed with CONSULT-II (EL-320). MA
Door Lock/Unlock and front power window down signal is supplied
I through smart entrance control unit terminal 33 EM
I to front power window main switch terminal 8 and
I to front power window switch RH terminal 11.
LC

IDX

EL-313
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Schematic

Schematic NAEL0393

MEL433O

EL-314
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — KEYLESS —

Wiring Diagram — KEYLESS — NAEL0394

GI
FIG. 1 NAEL0394S01

MEL411O
IDX

EL-315
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — KEYLESS — (Cont’d)
FIG. 2 NAEL0394S02

MEL412O

EL-316
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — KEYLESS — (Cont’d)
FIG. 3 NAEL0394S03
GI

MEL413O
IDX

EL-317
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — KEYLESS — (Cont’d)
FIG. 4 NAEL0394S05

MEL436P

EL-318
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure

CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure NAEL0395

GI
“MULTI REMOTE ENT” NAEL0395S01
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
MA
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to the data link connector.

LC
SEL331X

3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. EC

4. Touch “START”.
FE

MT
PBR455D
AT
5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.

SEL398Y SU
6. Touch “MULTI REMOTE ENT”.
BR

SEL401Y BT
7. Select diagnosis mode.
“DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT” HA
are available.

IDX
SEL274W

EL-319
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
CONSULT-II Application Items

CONSULT-II Application Items NAEL0457

“MULTI REMOTE ENT” NAEL0457S01
Data Monitor NAEL0457S0101

Monitored Item Description

IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ON position.

ACC ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position.

DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch.

KEY ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of key switch.

DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.

DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door switch RH.

LOCK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH.

UNLK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from lock/unlock switch LH and RH.

KEY CYL LK-SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key cylinder switch.

LK BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob.

UN BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.

TRUNK BTN/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk open signal from keyfob.

PANIC BTN Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of panic signal from keyfob.

UN BUTTON ON Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock switch form keyfob.

LK/UN BTN ON Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock/unlock signal at the same time from keyfob.
NOTE:
Even though TRUNK BTN/SIG is actually displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, it is not equipped, therefore, they cannot be activated.

Active Test NAEL0457S0102

Test Item Description

INT/IGN ILLUM This test is able to check interior lamp and ignition key hole illumination operation. The interior
lamp and ignition key hole illumination are turned on when “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is
touched.

HAZARD This test is able to check hazard reminder operation. The hazard lamp turns on when “ON” on
CONSULT-II screen is touched.

TRUNK OUTPUT This test is able to check trunk lid opener actuator operation. The trunk is unlocked when “ON”
on CONSULT-II screen is touched.

HORN This test is able to check panic alarm and horn reminder operations. The alarm activate for 0.5
seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.

HEAD LAMP This test is able to check headlamps panic alarm operation. The headlamp illuminates for 0.5
seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.

PW REMOTE DOWN SET This test is able to check power window open operation. The front power windows activate for
10 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
NOTE:
Even though TRUNK OUTPUT is actually displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, it is not equipped, therefore, they cannot be activated.

Work Support NAEL0457S0103

Test Item Description

REMO CONT ID CONFIR It can be checked whether keyfob ID code is registered or not in this mode.

REMO CONT ID REGIST Keyfob ID code can be registered.

REMO CONT ID ERASUR Keyfob ID code can be erased.

EL-320
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
CONSULT-II Application Items (Cont’d)

Test Item Description GI

MULTI ANSWER BACK SET Hazard and horn reminder mode can be changed with this mode. Selects hazard and horn
reminder mode among six steps (EL-311). MA
AUTO LOCK SET Auto door lock mode can be selected among the following periods:
I MODE 1 (5 min.)/MODE 2 (OFF-Mode)/MODE 3 (1 min.)
EM
PANIC ALARM SET The panic alarm button’s pressing time on keyfob can be selected among the following periods:
I MODE 1 (0.5 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF-Mode)/MODE 3 (1.5 sec.)

TRUNK OPENER The trunk lid opener button’s pressing time on keyfob can be selected among the following peri-
LC
ods:
I MODE 1 (0.5 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF-Mode)/MODE 3 (1.5 sec.)
EC
PW DOWN SET The unlock button’s pressing time on keyfob can be selected among the following periods:
I MODE 1 (3 sec.)/MODE 2 (OFF-Mode)/MODE 3 (5 sec.)
NOTE: FE
Even though TRUNK OPENER is actually displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, it is not equipped, therefore, they cannot be activated.

AT
Trouble Diagnoses NAEL0397
SYMPTOM CHART
NOTE:
NAEL0397S01
TF
I Always check keyfob battery before replacing keyfob.
I The panic alarm operation of remote keyless entry system PD
does not activate with the ignition key inserted in the ignition
key cylinder.
Reference
AX
Symptom Diagnoses/service procedure page
(EL- )
SU
All functions of remote keyless entry system do 1. Keyfob battery and function check 323
not operate.
2. Power supply and ground circuit for smart entrance control 324
unit check BR
3. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. 336
NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is ST
OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.

The new ID of keyfob cannot be entered. 1. Keyfob battery and function check 323
RS
2. Key switch (insert) check 328

3. Door switch check 326

BT
4. Door lock/unlock switch LH check 329

5. Power supply and ground circuit for smart entrance control 324 HA
unit check

6. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. 336

NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is SC
OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.

Door lock or unlock does not function. 1. Keyfob battery and function check 323
(If the power door lock system does not operate
manually, check power door lock system. Refer to 2. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. 336
EL-297) NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is
OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning. IDX

EL-321
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

Reference
Symptom Diagnoses/service procedure page
(EL- )

Hazard and horn reminder does not activate prop- 1. Keyfob battery and function check 323
erly when pressing lock or unlock button of key-
fob. 2. Hazard reminder check 330

3. Horn reminder check* 331

*: Horn chirp can be activated or deactivated.
First check the horn chirp setting. Refer to “System Description”,
EL-311.

4. Door switch check 326

5. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. 336

NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is
OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.

Interior room lamp operation do not activate prop- 1. Interior room lamp operation check 333
erly.
2. Door switch check 326

Panic alarm (horn and headlamp) does not acti- 1. Keyfob battery and function check 323
vate when panic alarm button is continuously
pressed. 2. Theft warning operation check. Refer to “PRELIMINARY 354
CHECK” in “VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM”.

3. Key switch (insert) check 328

4. Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure. 336

NOTE: If the result of keyfob function check with CONSULT-II is
OK, keyfob is not malfunctioning.

EL-322
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY AND FUNCTION GI
CHECK =NAEL0397S02

1 CHECK REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY MA

Remove battery (refer to EL-338) and measure voltage across battery positive and negative terminals, (+) and (−).
Voltage [V]:
2.5 - 3.0 EM
NOTE:
Keyfob does not function if battery is not set correctly.
LC

CL
SEL237W

OK or NG MT
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Replace battery. AT

2 CHECK REMOTE CONTROLLER FUNCTION TF

With CONSULT-II
Check keyfob function (“LK BUTTON/SIG”, “UN BUTTON/SIG”, “PANIC BTN”, “UN BUTTON ON” and “LK/UN BTN ON”)
in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. PD

SEL423Y ST
NOTE:
Even though TRUNK BTN/SIG is actually displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, it is not equipped, therefore, they cannot
be activated. RS
OK or NG
OK © Keyfob is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to “SYMPTOM CHART”, EL-321. BT
NG © Replace keyfob. Refer to ID Code Entry Procedure.
HA

IDX

EL-323
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK =NAEL0397S03
1 CHECK MAIN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M123 terminal 49 (G/R) or 51 (W/R) and ground.

SEL018Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-315.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check the following.
I 40A fusible link (letter f, located in fuse and fusible link box)
I 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I M145 circuit breaker
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse

2 CHECK IGNITION SWITCH “ACC” CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 26 (G/W) and ground while igni-
tion switch is “ACC”.

SEL019Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-315.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check the following.
I 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and fuse

EL-324
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

3 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT GI

Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 43 (B) or M123 terminal 64 (B)
and ground. MA

SEL020Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-315. FE
OK or NG
OK © Power supply and ground circuits are OK. CL
NG © Check ground harness.
MT

IDX

EL-325
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DOOR SWITCH CHECK =NAEL0397S04

1 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check door switches (“DOOR SW-RR”, “DOOR SW-DR” and “DOOR SW-AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.

SEL024Y

Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminals 1 (G/OR), 2 (Y) or 3 (R/L) and
ground.

SEL021YA
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-316.
OK or NG
OK © Door switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.

EL-326
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH GI

1. Disconnect door switch harness connector.
2. Check the following. MA
I Continuity between front door switch harness connector B9 (LH) or B68 (RH) terminals 1 and 2
I Continuity between front door switch harness connector B9 (LH) or B68 (RH) terminal 3 and ground
I Continuity between back door switch harness connector D208 terminals 1 and 2
I Continuity between rear door switch harness connector B18 (LH) or B71 (RH) terminal 1 and ground
EM

TF
SEL287Y

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
PD
I Door switch ground circuit (Front or back door) or door switch ground condition
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door switch
AX
NG © Replace door switch.

IDX

EL-327
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
KEY SWITCH (INSERT) CHECK =NAEL0397S05

1 CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check key switch (“KEY ON SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

SEL315W

Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between control unit harness connector M122 terminal 25 (W/R) and ground.

SEL022Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-315.
OK or NG
OK © Key switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)

Check continuity between key switch terminals 1 and 2.

SEL308X

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and key switch
NG © Replace key switch.

EL-328
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH LH CHECK =NAEL0397S06
GI
1 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT-II MA
Check door lock/unlock switch (“LOCK SW DR/AS”/“UNLK SW DR/AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

FE
SEL341W

Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove key from ignition switch. CL
2. Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 33 (BR) and ground with an
oscilloscope when door lock/unlock switch is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
3. Make sure signals shown in the figure below can be detected during the first 10 sec. just after door lock/unlock switch MT
is turned to “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.

AX
SEL396Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-315.
SU
OK or NG
OK © Door lock/unlock switch is OK.
BR
NG © Check the following.
I Ground circuit for each front power window switch
I Harness for open or short between each front power window switch and smart
entrance control unit connector
ST
If above systems are normal, replace the front power window switch.
RS

IDX

EL-329
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
HAZARD REMINDER CHECK =NAEL0397S07

1 CHECK HAZARD INDICATOR

Check if hazard indicator flashes with hazard switch.
Does hazard indicator operate?
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Check “hazard indicator” circuit.

2 CHECK HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION WITH CONSULT-II

With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “MULTI REMOTE ENT” with CONSULT-II.
2. Select “HAZARD” and touch “ON”.

SEL347W
NOTE: If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this procedure and go to the next step.
OK or NG
OK © Hazard reminder operation is OK.
NG © Replace smart entrance control unit.

3 CHECK HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION WITHOUT CONSULT-II

Without CONSULT-II
Apply ground to smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 47 (GY/L) and 48 (GY/R).

SEL027Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-317.
OK or NG
OK © System is OK.
NG © Replace smart entrance control unit.

EL-330
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
HORN REMINDER CHECK =NAEL0397S08
GI
1 CHECK HORN
Check if horn sounds with horn switch. MA
Does horn operate?
Yes © GO TO 2. EM
No © Check horn circuit.

LC
2 CHECK HORN REMINDER OPERATION WITH CONSULT-II
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “MULTI REMOTE ENT” with CONSULT-II.
EC
2. Select “HORN” and touch “ON”.
FE

AT
SEL451Y
NOTE: If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this procedure and go to the next step.
TF
OK or NG
OK © Horn reminder operation is OK.
PD
NG © GO TO 4.

3 CHECK HORN REMINDER OPERATION WITHOUT CONSULT-II

AX
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector. SU
2. Apply ground to smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 42 (LG/B).

BT
SEL028Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-317.
Does horn sound? HA
Yes © Replace smart entrance control unit.
No © GO TO 4. SC

IDX

EL-331
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

4 CHECK HORN RELAY

Check horn relay.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Replace horn relay.

5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR HORN RELAY

1. Disconnect horn relay harness connector.
2. Check voltage between horn relay harness connector E118 terminal 1 (G/B) and ground.

SEL326XA

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Check the following.
I 7.5A fuse [No. 52, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between horn relay and fuse

6 CHECK HORN RELAY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect horn relay harness connector.
2. Check voltage between horn relay harness connector E118 terminals 3 (G/B) and 5 (R).
3. Check voltage between horn relay harness connector E118 terminals 6 (LG) and 7 (G).

SEL327XA

OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and horn relay.
NG © Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between horn relay and fuse
I Harness for open or short between horn relay and horns

EL-332
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP OPERATION CHECK =NAEL0397S09
GI
1 CHECK ROOM INTERIOR LAMP
Check if the interior room lamp switch is in the “ON” position and the lamp illuminates. MA
Does interior room lamp illuminate?
Yes © GO TO 2. EM
No © Check the following.
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and interior room lamp
I Interior room lamp LC

2 CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP OPERATION EC

With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “MULTI REMOTE ENT” with CONSULT-II.
2. Select “INT/IGN ILLUM” and touch “ON”. FE

SEL312Y
TF

Without CONSULT-II PD
Push unlock button of keyfob with all doors closed and driver’s door locked, and check voltage between smart entrance
control unit harness connector M122 terminal 31 (R/B) and ground.
AX

ST
SEL029Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-315.
RS
OK or NG
OK © System is OK.
BT
NG © Check harness open or short between smart entrance control unit and interior room
lamp.
HA

IDX

EL-333
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
ID Code Entry Procedure

ID Code Entry Procedure =NAEL0398

KEYFOB ID SET UP WITH CONSULT-II NAEL0398S01
NOTE:
If a keyfob is lost, the ID code of the lost keyfob must be
erased to prevent unauthorized use. When the ID code of a
lost keyfob is not known, all keyfob ID codes should be
erased. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all
remaining and/or new keyfob must be re-registered.

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Connect CONSULT-II to the data link connector.

SEL331X

3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

4. Touch “START”.

PBR455D

5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.

SEL398Y

6. Touch “MULTI REMOTE ENT”.

SEL401Y

EL-334
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
ID Code Entry Procedure (Cont’d)
7. Touch “WORK SUPPORT”. GI

LC
SEL274W

8. The items are shown on the figure at left can be set up. EC
I “REMO CONT ID CONFIR”
Use this mode to confirm if a keyfob ID code is registered or
not. FE
I “REMO CONT ID REGIST”
Use this mode to register a keyfob ID code. CL
NOTE:
Register the ID code when keyfob or smart entrance control
unit is replaced, or when additional keyfob is required. MT
I “REMO CONT ID ERASUR”
SEL424Y Use this mode to erase a keyfob ID code.
Refer to the EL-320, “WORK SUPPORT” in “CONSULT-II Applica-
AT
tion Items” for the following items.
I “MULTI ANSWER BACK SET” TF
I “AUTO LOCK SET”
I “PANIC ALARM SET”
I “TRUNK OPENER” PD
I “PW DOWN SET”
NOTE: AX
Even though TRUNK OPENER is actually displayed on the CON-
SULT-II screen, it is not equipped, therefore, they cannot be acti-
vated. SU

IDX

EL-335
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
ID Code Entry Procedure (Cont’d)
KEYFOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-II NAEL0398S02

SEL170YA

EL-336
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
ID Code Entry Procedure (Cont’d)
NOTE: GI
I If a keyfob is lost, the ID code of the lost keyfob must be erased
to prevent unauthorized use. A specific ID code can be erased
with CONSULT-II. However, when the ID code of a lost keyfob MA
is not known, all keyfob ID codes should be erased. After all
ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all remaining and/or new
keyfob must be re-registered. EM
To erase all ID codes in memory, register one ID code (keyfob)
four times. After all ID codes are erased, the ID codes of all
remaining and/or new keyfob must be re-registered. LC
I When registering an additional keyfob, the existing ID codes in
memory may or may not be erased. If four ID codes are stored
in memory, when an additional code is registered, only the EC
oldest code is erased. If less than four ID codes are stored in
memory, when an additional ID code is registered, the new ID
code is added and no ID codes are erased. FE
I If you need to activate more than two additional new keyfob,
repeat the procedure “Additional ID code entry” for each new
keyfob.
CL
I Entry of maximum four ID codes is allowed. When more than
four ID codes are entered, the oldest ID code will be erased. MT
I Even if the same ID code that is already in the memory is input,
the same ID code can be entered. The code is counted as an
additional code. AT

IDX

EL-337
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
Keyfob Battery Replacement

Keyfob Battery Replacement NAEL0399

SEL485Y

EL-338
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location

Component Parts and Harness Connector GI

Location NAEL0400

SEL484Y
IDX

EL-339
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
System Description

System Description NAEL0401

DESCRIPTION NAEL0401S01
1. Operation Flow NAEL0401S0101

SEL334W

2. Setting The Vehicle Security System NAEL0401S0102

Initial condition
1) Ignition switch is in OFF position.
Disarmed phase
When the vehicle security system is in the disarmed phase, the security indicator lamp blinks every 2.6 sec-
onds.
Pre-armed phase and armed phase
When the following operation 1) or 2) is performed, the vehicle security system turns into the “pre-armed”
phase. (The security indicator lamp illuminates.)
1) Smart entrance control unit receives LOCK signal from key cylinder switch or keyfob after hood, glass
hatch and all doors are closed.
2) Hood, glass hatch and all doors are closed after front doors are locked by key, lock/unlock switch or multi-
remote controller.
After about 30 seconds, the system automatically shifts into the “armed” phase (the system is set). (The
security indicator lamp blinks every 2.6 seconds.)
3. Canceling The Set Vehicle Security System NAEL0401S0103
When the following 1) or 2) operation is performed, the armed phase is canceled.
1) Unlock the doors with the key or keyfob.
2) Open the glass hatch with the key or keyfob.
4. Activating The Alarm Operation of The Vehicle Security System NAEL0401S0104
Make sure the system is in the armed phase. (The security indicator lamp blinks every 2.6 seconds.)
When the following operation 1) or 2) is performed, the system sounds the horns and flashes the headlamps
for about 50 seconds.
1) Engine hood, glass hatch or any door is opened during armed phase.
2) Disconnecting and connecting the battery connector before canceling armed phase.
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND NAEL0401S02
Power is supplied at all times
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to security indicator lamp terminal 1, and
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 49.

EL-340
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied GI
I through 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 27.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied MA
I through 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I to smart entrance control unit terminal 26. EM
Ground is supplied
I to smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64
I through body grounds M77 and M111.
LC
INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM
The operation of the vehicle security system is controlled by the doors, hood and glass hatch.
NAEL0401S03
EC
Pattern A NAEL0401S0301
To activate the vehicle security system, the smart entrance control unit must receive signals indicating the FE
doors, hood and glass hatch are closed.
When a door is open, smart entrance control unit terminal 1, 2 or 3 receives a ground signal from each door
switch. CL
When the hood is open, smart entrance control unit terminal 6 receives a ground signal
I from terminal 1 of the hood switch
MT
I through body grounds E13 and E41.
When the glass hatch is open, smart entrance control unit terminal 13 receives a ground signal
I from terminal 1 of the glass hatch switch AT
I through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
When smart entrance control unit receives LOCK signal from key cylinder switch or keyfob and none of the TF
described conditions exist, the vehicle security system will automatically shift to armed mode.
Pattern B NAEL0401S0302
To activate the vehicle security system, the smart entrance control unit must receive signal indicating any door
PD
(including hood and glass hatch) is opened.
When the front doors are locked with key, lock/unlock switch or keyfob and then all doors are closed, the AX
vehicle security system will automatically shift to armed mode.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ACTIVATION
Pattern A
NAEL0401S04
SU
NAEL0401S0401
With all doors (including hood and glass hatch) closed, if the key is used to lock doors, smart entrance con-
trol unit terminal 33 receives a signal from power window main switch terminal 8. BR
When key cylinder switch is in LOCK position, ground is supplied
I to power window main switch terminal 6
I from terminal 3 of the front key cylinder switch LH ST
I through terminal 2 of front key cylinder switch LH
I through body grounds M77 and M111, or
RS
smart entrance control unit terminal 11 receives a ground signal
I from terminal 1 of the back door key cylinder switch
I through body grounds B11, B22 and D210. BT
If this signal, or lock signal from keyfob is received by the smart entrance control unit, the vehicle security
system will activate automatically.
HA
NOTE:
Vehicle security system can be set even though all doors are not locked.
Pattern B SC
NAEL0401S0402
With any door (including hood and glass hatch) open, if lock/unlock switch is used to lock doors, smart entrance
control unit terminal 33 receives a LOCK signal
I from terminal 8 of lock/unlock switch LH
I through body grounds M77 and M111, or
I from terminal 11 of lock/unlock switch RH IDX

EL-341
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
I through body grounds M4, M66 and M147, or
With any door (including hood and glass hatch) open if the key is used to lock doors, smart entrance control
unit terminal 33 receives a LOCK signal from power window main front switch terminal 8.
When key cylinder switch LOCK signal ground is supplied
I to power window main switch terminal 6
I from terminal 3 of the front key cylinder switch LH
I through terminal 2 of front key cylinder switch LH
I through body grounds M9, M25 and M87, or
smart entrance control unit terminal 11 receives a ground signal
I from terminal 1 of the back door key cylinder switch
I through body grounds B11, B22 and D210.
If these signals and lock signal from keyfob are received by the smart entrance control unit, ground signals
of terminals 1, 2 and 3 are interrupted and all doors are closed, the vehicle security system will activate auto-
matically.
NOTE:
Vehicle security system can be set even though the rear door is not locked.
Once the vehicle security system has been activated, smart entrance control unit terminal 38 supplies ground
to terminal 2 of the security indicator lamp.
The security lamp will illuminate for approximately 30 seconds and then blinks every 2.6 seconds.
Now the vehicle security system is in armed phase.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION NAEL0401S05
The vehicle security system is triggered by
I opening a door
I opening the hood or the glass hatch
I detection of battery disconnect and connect.
Once the vehicle security system is in armed phase, if the smart entrance control unit receives a ground sig-
nal at terminal 1, 2, 3 (door switch), 13 (glass hatch switch) or 6 (hood switch), the vehicle security system
will be triggered. The headlamps flash and the horn sounds intermittently.
Power is supplied at all times
I through 7.5A fuse (No. 52, located in fuse and fusible link box)
I to horn relay terminals 1 and 3.
I through 10A fuse (No. 54, located in fuse and fusible link box)
I to horn relay terminal 6.
I through 15A fuse (No. 60, located in fuse and fusible link box)
I to headlamp LH relay terminals 1 and 3,
I through 15A fuse (No. 59, located in fuse and fusible link box)
I to headlamp RH relay terminals 1 and 3.
When the vehicle security system is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently
I to headlamp (LH and RH) relay terminal 2 from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59
I through smart entrance control unit terminals 43 and 64.
When headlamp relays (LH and RH) are energized and then power is supplied to headlamps (LH and RH).
The headlamps flash intermittently.
When the vehicle security system is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently
I from smart entrance control unit terminal 42
I to horn relay terminal 2.
When horn relay are energized, then power is supplied to horn.
The horn sounds intermittently.
The alarm automatically turns off after 50 seconds but will reactivate if the vehicle is tampered with again.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM DEACTIVATION NAEL0401S06
To deactivate the vehicle security system, a door or glass hatch must be unlocked with the key or keyfob.
When the key is used to unlock the door, smart entrance control unit terminal 33 receives an UNLOCK sig-
nal from power window main switch terminal 18.
When key cylinder switch is in UNLOCK position, the ground is supplied

EL-342
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
I to power window main switch terminal 19 GI
I from the front door key cylinder switch LH terminal 1
I through front door key cylinder switch terminal 2,
I through body grounds M77 and M111. MA
When the key is used to open the glass hatch, smart entrance control unit terminal 12 receives a ground sig-
nal from terminal 3 of the back door key cylinder switch. EM
When the smart entrance control unit receives either one of these signals or unlock signal from keyfob, the
vehicle security system is deactivated. (Disarmed phase)
PANIC ALARM OPERATION LC
NAEL0401S07
Remote keyless entry system may or may not operate vehicle security system (horn and headlamps) as
required. EC
When the remote keyless entry system (panic alarm) is triggered, ground is supplied intermittently
I from smart entrance control unit terminals 21 and 59
I to headlamp (LH and RH) relay terminal 2 FE
I from smart entrance control unit terminal 42
I to horn relay terminal 2.
CL
The headlamp flashes and the horn sounds intermittently.
The alarm automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when smart entrance control unit receives any signal
from keyfob. MT

IDX

EL-343
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Schematic

Schematic NAEL0402

MEL873N

EL-344
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Schematic (Cont’d)

MEL437P

IDX

EL-345
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC —

Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — NAEL0403

FIG. 1 NAEL0403S01

MEL414O

EL-346
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (Cont’d)
FIG. 2 NAEL0403S02
GI

MEL438P
IDX

EL-347
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (Cont’d)
FIG. 3 NAEL0403S03

MEL439P

EL-348
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (Cont’d)
FIG. 4 NAEL0403S04
GI

MEL477O
IDX

EL-349
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (Cont’d)
FIG. 5 NAEL0403S05

MEL440P

EL-350
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC — (Cont’d)
FIG. 6 NAEL0403S06
GI

MEL441P
IDX

EL-351
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure

CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure =NAEL0404

“THEFT WAR ALM” NAEL0404S01
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to the data link connector.

SEL331X

3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

4. Touch “START”.

PBR455D

5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.

SEL941W

6. Touch “THEFT WAR ALM”.

SEL273W

7. Select diagnosis mode.

“DATA MONITOR”, “ACTIVE TEST” and “WORK SUPPORT”
are available.

SEL274W

EL-352
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
CONSULT-II Application Item

CONSULT-II Application Item NAEL0405

GI
“THEFT WAR ALM” NAEL0405S01
Data Monitor NAEL0405S0101 MA
Monitored Item Description

IGN ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch. EM

ACC ON SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of ignition switch in ACC position.

KEY CYL LK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from key cylinder switch. LC
KEY CYL UN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from key cylinder switch.

DOOR SW-RR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch. EC

DOOR SW-DR Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch LH.

DOOR SW-AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch RH.

FE
TRUNK SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door switch.
CL
TRUNK KEY SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door key cylinder switch.

HOOD SWITCH Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of hood switch.

MT
LOCK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door lock/unlock switch LH and RH.

UNLK SW DR/AS Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door lock/unlock LH and RH.
AT
LK BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from keyfob.

UN BUTTON/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from keyfob.

TF
TRUNK BTN/SIG Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of trunk open signal from keyfob.
NOTE:
Even though TRUNK BTN/SIG is actually displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, it is not equipped, therefore, they cannot be activated.
PD
Active Test NAEL0405S0102
AX
Test Item Description

This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation. The lamp will be turned on when
THEFT IND
“ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. SU
This test is able to check vehicle security alarm operation. The alarm will be activated for 0.5
HORN
seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched. BR
This test is able to check vehicle security alarm headlamp operation. The headlamp illumi-
HEADLAMP
nates for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT-II screen is touched.
ST
Work Support NAEL0405S0103

Test Item Description RS

The switch which triggered theft warning alarm is recorded. This mode is able to confirm and
THEFT ALM TRG erase the record of theft waning alarm. The trigger data can be erased by touching “CLEAR” BT
on CONSULT-II screen.

IDX

EL-353
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses =NAEL0406

PRELIMINARY CHECK NAEL0406S01
The system operation is canceled by turning ignition switch to
“ACC” at any step between START and ARMED in the following
flow chart.

SEL733W

After performing preliminary check, go to symptom chart

below.

EL-354
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
SYMPTOM CHART NAEL0406S02
GI
REFERENCE PAGE (EL- ) 354 356 357 362 364 366 369 371 321
MA

DOOR, HOOD AND GLASS HATCH SWITCH CHECK

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK

VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM CHECK

BACK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK
EM

VEHICLE SECURITY HORN ALARM CHECK

Check “MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL” system.

DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK
SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK
LC

SYMPTOM EC

PRELIMINARY CHECK
FE

MT
Vehicle security indicator does not
X X X X
illuminate for 30 seconds. AT
All items X X X
Vehicle security
system cannot
be set by ....

1
Door outside key X X TF
Back door key X X

Multi-remote control X X PD
*1 Vehicle security
system does not

Any door is opened. X X

alarm when ...

AX
2
Any door is unlocked
without using key or X SU
multi-remote controller

BR
Vehicle security
alarm does not

All function X X
activate.

3 Horn alarm X X
ST
Headlamp alarm X X

RS
system cannot be
Vehicle security

Door outside key X X

canceled by ....

4 Back door key X X BT

Multi-remote control X X
HA
X : Applicable
*1: Make sure the system is in the armed phase.
SC
Before starting trouble diagnoses above, perform preliminary
check, EL-354.
Symptom numbers in the symptom chart correspond with those of
preliminary check.

IDX

EL-355
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK NAEL0406S03
Power Supply Circuit Check NAEL0406S0301

Terminals Ignition switch position

(+)

Terminal (−) OFF ACC ON

Connector
(Wire color)

Battery Battery Battery

M123 49 (G/R) Ground
voltage voltage voltage

Battery Battery
M122 26 (G/W) Ground 0V
voltage voltage

Battery
M122 27 (W/B) Ground 0V 0V
voltage

If NG, check the following.

I 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I 10A fuse [No. 10, located in fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit
and fuse.
SEL281Y

Ground Circuit Check NAEL0406S0302

Terminals

(+)
Continuity
Terminal (−)
Connector
(Wire color)

M122 43 (B)
Ground Yes
M123 64 (B)

SEL282Y

EL-356
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DOOR, HOOD AND GLASS HATCH SWITCH CHECK
=NAEL0406S04
GI
Door Switch Check NAEL0406S0401

1 PRELIMINARY CHECK MA
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and remove key from ignition key cylinder.
“SECURITY” indicator lamp should blink every 2.6 seconds.
2. Close all doors, hood and glass hatch. EM
3. Lock doors with multi-remote controller from inside the vehicle.
“SECURITY” indicator lamp should turn on for 30 seconds.
4. Unlock any door with the door lock knob and open the door within 30 seconds after door is locked. LC
“SECURITY” indicator lamp should turn off.
OK or NG
EC
OK © Door switch is OK, and go to hood switch check.
NG © GO TO 2.
FE
2 CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
CL
With CONSULT-II
Check door switches (“DOOR SW-RR”, “DOOR SW-DR” and “DOOR SW-AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
MT

SEL024Y
AX
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminals 1 (G/OR), 2 (Y) or 3 (R/L) and
ground. SU

SEL021YA BT
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-347.
OK or NG
HA
OK © Door switch is OK, and go to hood switch check.
NG © GO TO 3.
SC

IDX

EL-357
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

3 CHECK DOOR SWITCH

1. Disconnect door switch connector.
2. Check the following.
I Continuity between front door switch harness connector B9 (LH) or B68 (RH) terminals 1 and 2
I Continuity between front door switch harness connector B9 (LH) or B68 (RH) terminals 3 and ground
I Continuity between back door switch harness connector D208 terminals 1 and 2
I Continuity between rear door switch harness connector B18 (LH) or B71 (RH) terminal 1 and ground

SEL287Y

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Door switch ground circuit (Front or back) or door switch ground condition
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door switch
NG © Replace door switch.

EL-358
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Hood Switch Check =NAEL0406S0402
GI
1 PRELIMINARY CHECK
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and remove key from ignition key cylinder. MA
“SECURITY” indicator lamp should blink every 2.6 seconds.
2. Close all doors, hood and trunk lid.
3. Lock doors with multi-remote controller from inside the vehicle. EM
“SECURITY” indicator lamp should turn on for 30 seconds.
4. Unlock hood with hood opener within 30 seconds after door is locked.
“SECURITY” indicator lamp should turn off. LC
OK or NG
OK © Hood switch is OK, and go to trunk room lamp switch check. EC
NG © GO TO 2.

FE
2 CHECK HOOD SWITCH FITTING CONDITION

OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Adjust installation of hood switch or hood. MT

3 CHECK HOOD SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

AT
With CONSULT-II
Check hood switch (“HOOD SWITCH”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
TF

SU
SEL354W

Without CONSULT-II BR
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminal 6 (Y/B) and ground.

HA
SEL035Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-346.
OK or NG
SC
OK © Hood switch is OK, and go to glass hatch switch check.
NG © GO TO 4.

IDX

EL-359
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

4 CHECK HOOD SWITCH

1. Disconnect hood switch connector.
2. Check continuity between hood switch terminals 1 and 2.

SEL338X

OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Hood switch ground circuit
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and hood switch
NG © Replace hood switch.

EL-360
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
Glass Hatch Switch Check =NAEL0406S0403
GI
1 CHECK GLASS HATCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminal 13 (L/W) and ground. MA

SEL326Y FE
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-346.
OK or NG
CL
OK © Glass hatch switch is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.
MT
2 CHECK GLASS HATCH SWITCH
1. Disconnect glass hatch switch connector. AT
2. Check continuity between glass hatch switch terminals 1 and 2.

SU
SEL340X

OK or NG
BR
OK © Check the following.
I Glass hatch switch ground circuit
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and glass hatch switch ST
NG © Replace glass hatch switch.

IDX

EL-361
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK =NAEL0406S05

1 CHECK INDICATOR LAMP OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “THEFT WAR ALM” with CONSULT-II.
2. Select “THEFT IND” and touch “ON”.

SEL356W

Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 38 (BR/Y) and ground.

SEL037Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-346.
OK or NG
OK © Security indicator lamp is OK.
NG © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK INDICATOR LAMP

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Replace indicator lamp.

EL-362
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR INDICATOR LAMP GI

1. Disconnect security lamp connector.
2. Check voltage between indicator lamp terminal 1 and ground. MA

SEL342X
FE
Does battery voltage exist?
Yes © Check harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and smart entrance
control unit. CL
No © Check the following.
I 7.5A fuse [No. 24, located in fuse block (J/B)] MT
I Harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and fuse

IDX

EL-363
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK =NAEL0406S06

1 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL)

With CONSULT-II
Check front door key cylinder switch (“KEY CYL LK-SW”/“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.

SEL342W

Without CONSULT-II
1. Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 33 (BR) and ground with oscil-
loscope when key inserted in front key cylinder is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
2. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec. just after key is turned “LOCK”
or “UNLOCK”.

EL-364
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

2 CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH GI

1. Disconnect door key cylinder switch LH connector.
2. Check continuity between door key cylinder switch LH terminals. MA

SEL313X
FE
OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Door key cylinder switch LH ground circuit CL
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and door key cylinder
switch LH
MT
NG © Replace door key cylinder switch LH.

IDX

EL-365
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
BACK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK =NAEL0406S07

1 CHECK BACK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL (LOCK/UNLOCK SIGNAL)
With CONSULT-II
Check back door key cylinder switch (“KEY CYL LK-SW”/“KEY CYL UN-SW”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.

SEL342WB

Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between smart entrance control unit terminals 10 (LG), 11 (Y) or 12 (G/B) and ground.

EL-366
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

2 CHECK BACK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH GI

1. Disconnect back door key cylinder switch connector.
2. Check continuity between back door key cylinder switch terminals. MA

SEL345X
FE
OK or NG
OK © Check the following.
I Back door key cylinder switch ground circuit CL
I Harness for open or short between smart entrance control unit and back door key cyl-
inder switch
MT
NG © Replace back door key cylinder switch.

IDX

EL-367
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK =NAEL0406S08

1 CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
Check door lock/unlock switch (“LOCK SW DR/AS”/“UNLK SW DR/AS”) in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

SEL341W

Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove key from ignition switch.
2. Check the signal between smart entrance control unit harness connector M144 terminal 33 (BR) and ground with oscil-
loscope when door lock/unlock switch is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.
3. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 10 sec. just after door lock/unlock
switch is turned “LOCK” or “UNLOCK”.

SEL487Y
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-348.
OK or NG
OK © Door lock/unlock switch is OK.
NG © Check the following.
I Ground circuit for each front power window switch
I Harness for open or short between each front power window switch and smart
entrance control unit connector
If above systems are normal, replace the front power window switch.

EL-368
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
VEHICLE SECURITY HORN ALARM CHECK =NAEL0406S09
GI
1 CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HORN
With CONSULT-II MA
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “THEFT WAR ALM” with CONSULT-II.
2. Select “HORN” and touch “ON”.
EM

FE
SEL041Y
CL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit harness connector.
2. Apply ground to smart entrance control unit harness connector M121 terminal 42 (LG/B). MT

SEL043Y AX
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-349.
NOTE:
If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this procedure and go to the next step. SU
OK or NG
OK © Horn alarm is OK. BR
NG © GO TO 2.

IDX

EL-369
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR HORN RELAY

1. Disconnect horn relay connector.
2. Check voltage between terminal 2 and ground.

SEL347X

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Check the following.
I 7.5A fuse (No. 52, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
I Harness for open or short between horn relay and fuse

4 CHECK HORN RELAY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect horn relay connector.
2. Check voltage between terminals 3 and 5.
3. Check voltage between terminals 6 and 7.

SEL348X

OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between horn relay and smart entrance control unit.
NG © Check harness for open or short.

EL-370
VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM CHECK =NAEL0406S10 GI
1 CHECK VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM OPERATION
With CONSULT-II MA
1. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “THEFT WAR ALM” with CONSULT-II.
2. Select “HEADLAMP” and touch “ON”.
EM

FE
SEL042Y
CL
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit connector.
2. Apply ground to smart entrance control unit terminal 4. MT

SEL198Y AX
Refer to wiring diagram in EL-350.
NOTE:
If CONSULT-II is not available, skip this procedure and go to the next step. SU
OK or NG
OK © Headlamp is OK. BR
NG © GO TO 2.

ST
2 CHECK HEADLAMP OPERATION

Does headlamp come on when turning lighting switch “ON”? RS

Yes © Check harness for open or short between headlamp relay and smart entrance control
unit.
BT
No © Check headlamp system. Refer to “HEADLAMP”.

IDX

EL-371
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
Description

Description NAEL0407
OUTLINE NAEL0407S01
The smart entrance control unit totally controls the following body electrical system operations.
I Headlamp auto light control system
I Warning chime
I Rear defogger and door mirror defogger timer
I Power door lock
I Remote keyless entry system
I Vehicle security system
I Interior lamp
In addition, the following timer operations are controlled by the smart entrance control unit.
I Battery saver control
I Retained power control
BATTERY SAVER CONTROL NAEL0407S02
Headlamps/Parking Lamps/License Lamps/Tail Lamps/Fog Lamps/Illumination LampsNAEL0407S0201
While the headlamps (including parking, license, tail, fog and illumination lamps) are turned ON by “1ST” or
“2ND” of lighting switch, the exterior lamp battery saver control is activated when the ignition switch signal
changes from ON (or ACC) to OFF, and either one of LH or RH front door switch ON signal is received. The
headlamps (including parking, license, tail, fog and illumination lamps) are turned off after 5 minutes.
While the headlamps are turned ON by “AUTO” operation, the exterior lamp battery saver control is activated
when the ignition switch is turned from ON (or ACC) to OFF, and either LH or RH front door switch ON sig-
nal is input.
The smart entrance control unit controls timer activation as follows:
I When the door switch signal changes from ON to OFF while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated,
the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the headlamps (including parking,
license, tail, fog and illumination lamps) will be turned off.
I When the door switch signal changes from OFF to ON while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated,
the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the headlamps will be turned off.
I When the one of four door switch signals changes from OFF to ON while the exterior lamp battery saver
is activated, the operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 5 minutes, then the headlamps (including
parking, license, tail, fog and illumination lamps) will be turned off.
I When all the door switch ON signals are input while the exterior lamp battery saver is activated, the
operation is discontinued, restarts and lasts for 45 seconds, then the headlamps (including parking,
license, tail, fog and illumination lamps) will be turned off.
The “45” second timer’s duration can be changed with the function setting mode of CONSULT-II.
Interior Lamp/Luggage Room Lamp/Spot Lamp/Vanity Mirror Illumination NAEL0407S0202
The lamps turn off automatically when the interior lamp, spot lamp or/and vanity mirror illumination are illumi-
nated with the ignition key in the OFF position, if the lamp remains lit by the door switch open signal or if the
lamp switch is in the ON position for more than 30 minutes.
After lamps are turned off by the battery saver system, the lamps illuminate again when:
I Door is locked or unlocked with keyfob or door lock/unlock switch or door key cylinder.
I Ignition switch ON.
I Door is opened or closed,
I Key is inserted or removed into ignition key cylinder.
Rear Window Defogger/Door Mirror Defogger NAEL0407S0203
Rear window defogger and door mirror defogger are turned off in approximately 15 minutes after the rear win-
dow defogger switch is turned on.
RETAINED POWER CONTROL NAEL0407S03
When the ignition switch is turned to OFF (or ACC) position from ON or START position, the following sys-
tems can be operated for 45 seconds by the RAP signal from the smart entrance control unit terminal 46.
I Electric sunroof
I Power window
The retained power operation is canceled when the driver or passenger side door is opened.
EL-372
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
Description (Cont’d)
INPUT/OUTPUT NAEL0407S04
GI
System Input Output

Door lock and unlock switch LH and RH MA

Key switch (Insert)
Power door lock Door lock actuator
Door switches
Door key cylinder switches EM
Key switch (Insert) Horn relay
Ignition switch (ACC) Headlamp relay (LH and RH)
Multi-remote control Door switches Hazard warning lamp
LC
Remote controller signal Interior lamp
Door lock/unlock switch LH Door lock actuator
EC
Horn relay
Vehicle security horn relay-1
Key switch (Insert)
Ignition switch (ACC)
Vehicle security horn relay-2 FE
Hazard warning lamp
Remote keyless entry Door switches
Interior lamp
Keyfob signal
Ignition key hole illumination
Door lock/unlock switch LH
Door lock actuator
CL
Opener actuator

Key switch (Insert) MT

Ignition switch (ON)
Warning chime (located in smart entrance
Warning chime Lighting switch (1st)
control unit)
Seat belt switch (driver’s seat) AT
Front door switch LH

Rear window defogger and Ignition switch (ON)

door mirror defogger Rear window defogger switch
Rear window defogger relay TF
Ignition switch (ACC, ON)
Door switches PD
Hood switch Vehicle security horn relay-2
Vehicle security Trunk room lamp switch Headlamp relay
Door lock/unlock switches Security indicator
Door key cylinder switches (lock/unlock)
AX
Key cylinder switch (unlock)

Door switches SU
Keyfob signal (lock/unlock) Interior lamp
Door lock/unlock switches (lock/unlock) Key hole illumination
Interior lamp
Door key cylinder switch (lock/unlock) Step lamp BR
Ignition switch (ON) Door indicator
Key switch (Insert)

Headlamps ST
Battery saver control for Parking lamps
Ignition switch (ON)
headlamps/parking lamps/ Licence lamps
Front door switches
licence lamps/tail lamps/fog
Lighting switches
Tail lamps RS
lamps/illumination lamps Fog lamps
Illumination lamps

Interior lamp
BT
Battery saver control for inte- Ignition switch (ON)
Step lamp
rior lamp/spot lamp/vanity mir- Front door switches
Spot lamp
ror illumination Lamp switches
Vanity mirror illumination HA
Battery saver control for rear
Ignition switch (ON)
window defogger and door
Rear window defogger switch
Rear window defogger relay SC
mirror defogger

Retained power control for Ignition switch (ON)

Sunroof motor
electric sunroof Front door switches

Retained power control for Ignition switch (ON)

Power window relay
power window Front door switches IDX

EL-373
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
CONSULT-II

CONSULT-II NAEL0408
DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS APPLICATION NAEL0408S01

Item (CONSULT-II Diagnosed system DATA MONITOR ACTIVE TEST WORK SUPPORT
screen terms)

DOOR LOCK Power door lock X X X

REAR DEFOGGER Rear window defogger X X

KEY WARN ALM Warning chime X X

LIGHT WARN ALM Warning chime X X

SEAT BELT ALM Warning chime X X

INT LAMP Interior lamps X X X

BATTERY SAVER Battery saver control for

X X X
interior lamp

THEFT WAR ALM Vehicle security system X X X

RETAINED PWR Retained power control X X X

MULTI REMOTE ENT Remote keyless entry

X X X
system

HEAD LAMP Headlamp X X X

X: Applicable
For diagnostic item in each control system, refer to the relevant pages for each system.

DIAGNOSTIC ITEM DESCRIPTION NAEL0408S02

MODE Description

DATA MONITOR Input/output data in the smart entrance control unit can be
read.

ACTIVE TEST Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some sys-
tems apart from the smart entrance control unit.

WORK SUPPORT for DOOR LOCK I Select unlock mode ON-OFF setting can be changed.
I Key reminder door mode ON-OFF setting can be changed.

WORK SUPPORT for INT LAMP Interior lamp timer mode ON-OFF setting can be changed.

WORK SUPPORT for BATTERY SAVER Interior lamp battery saver period can be changed.

WORK SUPPORT for THEFT WAR ALM I The recorded trigger signal when vehicle security system
was activated can be checked.
I Security alarm ON-OFF setting can be changed.

WORK SUPPORT for RETAINED PWR SET RAP signal’s power supply period can be changed.

WORK SUPPORT for MULTI REMOTE ENT I ID code of keyfob can be registered and erased.
I Keyless answer back mode can be changed.
I Pressing time of panic alarm, trunk lid opener and door
unlock (for power window down operation) buttons on keyfob
can be changed.
I Auto lock operation starting time can be changed.

WORK SUPPORT for HEADLAMP I Auto light sensitivity can be changed.

I Exterior lamp battery saver control ON-OFF setting can be
changed.
I Auto light delay off time can be changed.

EL-374
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE NAEL0408S03 GI
1. Turn the ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to the data link connector.
MA

LC
SEL331X

3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. EC

4. Touch “START”.
FE

MT
PBR455D
AT
5. Touch “SMART ENTRANCE”.

SEL398Y SU
6. Perform each diagnostic item according to “DIAGNOSTIC
ITEMS APPLICATION”. Refer to EL-374.
BR

SEL401Y BT

IDX

EL-375
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
Schematic

Schematic NAEL0409

MEL442P

EL-376
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
Schematic (Cont’d)

MEL443P
IDX

EL-377
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table

Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table NAEL0410

Voltage
Terminal Wire
Connections Operated condition (Approximate val-
No. color
ues)

1 G/OR Driver door switch OFF (Closed) , ON (Open) 12V , 0V

2 Y Passenger door switch OFF (Closed) , ON (Open) 5V , 0V

3 R/L Rear door switch OFF (Closed) , ON (Open) 5V , 0V

4 LG/R Door lock & unlock switches Neutral , Unlocks 5V , 0V

5 BR Door lock & unlock switches Neutral , Locks 5V , 0V

6 Y/B Hood switch ON (Open) , OFF (Closed) 0V , 12V

Light is applied to auto light sen-

1 to 5V
Ignition switch ON sor.
7 W/G Auto light sensor (Signal)
position Light is not applied to auto light
Less than 1V
sensor.

8 L/R Auto light sensor (GND) — —

9 GY Auto light sensor (Power) Ignition switch (OFF , ON) 0V , 5V

Door key cylinder unlock

10 LG OFF (Neutral) , ON (Locked) 5V , 0V
switch

11 Y Door key cylinder lock switch OFF (Neutral) , ON (Locked) 5V , 0V

12 W/PU Back door key cylinder switch OFF (Neutral) , ON (Unlock) 5V , 0V

13 L/W Glass hatch switch ON (Open) , OFF (Closed) 0V , 12V

14 OR Rear window defogger switch OFF , ON (Only when pushed) 5V , 0V

More than 5
minutes after
ignition switch is 12V
turned to OFF
Ignition switch ON or START position
(with lighting , OFF position Within 5 min-
switch 1ST or
19 R/G Tail lamp relay (Output) utes after igni-
2ND)
tion switch is 0V
turned to OFF
position

ON or START position 0V

Headlamps illuminate by auto light control. (Operate Less than 1V ,

, Not operate) 12V

20 G Tail lamp switch Light switch (OFF or AUTO , 1ST or 2ND position) 12V , 0V

More than 5
minutes after
ignition switch is 12V
turned to OFF
ON or START position
Ignition switch
(with lighting , OFF position Within 5 min-
21 PU/R Headlamp LH relay switch 2ND) utes after igni-
tion switch is 0V
turned to OFF
position

ON or START position 0V

Headlamps illuminate by auto light control. 0V

EL-378
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table (Cont’d)

Voltage GI
Terminal Wire
Connections Operated condition (Approximate val-
No. color
ues)
MA
Except PASS or 2ND position 12V
Lighting switch
PASS or 2ND position 0V
22 SB Headlamp switch EM
Headlamps illuminate by auto light control. (Operate
10V , 12V
, Not operate)

Ignition switch Lighting switch (Except AUTO ,

LC
23 L/Y Headlamp switch 12V , 0V
“ON” position AUTO position)

25 W/R Ignition key switch (Insert) Key inserted , Key removed from IGN key cylinder 12V , 0V EC
26 G/W Ignition switch (ACC) “ACC” position 12V

27 W/B Ignition switch (ON) Ignition key is in “ON” position 12V FE

Unfastened , Fastened (Ignition key is in “ON” posi-
28 B/Y Seat belt buckle switch 0V , 12V
tion)
CL
When doors are locked using keyfob (Lamp switch in
31 R/B Interior lamp 0V , 12V
“DOOR” position)
MT
37 G/B Rear window defogger relay OFF , ON (Ignition key is in “ON” position) 12V , 0V

38 BR/Y Security indicator Goes off , Illuminates 12V , 0V

AT
When panic alarm is operated using keyfob (ON ,
42 LG/B Horn relay 12V , 0V
OFF)

43 B Ground — — TF
46 R/Y Power window relay Retained power operation is operated (ON , OFF) 12V , 0V

When door lock or unlock is operated using keyfob

PD
47 GY/L LH turn signal lamp 12V , 0V
(ON , OFF)

48 GY/R RH turn signal lamp

When door lock or unlock is operated using keyfob
12V , 0V
AX
(ON , OFF)

49 G/R Power source (Fuse) — 12V

SU
Battery saver operates , Does not operate (ON
50 R/W Battery saver (Interior lamp) 12V , 0V
,OFF)

51 W/R Power source (PTC) — 12V

BR
54 L Door lock actuators Door lock & unlock switch (Free , Lock) 0V , 12V
ST
55 W/PU Driver door lock actuator Door lock & unlock switch (Free , Unlock) 0V , 12V

Passenger, rear and back

56 Y/B Door lock & unlock switch (Free , Unlock) 0V , 12V RS
doors lock actuator

More than 5
minutes after BT
ignition switch is 12V
turned to OFF
Ignition switch position
ON or START HA
(with lighting , OFF position Within 5 min-
switch 1ST or
57 R Tail lamp relay utes after igni-
2ND)
tion switch is 0V SC
turned to OFF
position

ON or START position 0V

Headlamps illuminate by auto light control. (Operate Less than 1V,

, Not operate) 12V IDX

EL-379
SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT
Smart Entrance Control Unit Inspection Table (Cont’d)

Voltage
Terminal Wire
Connections Operated condition (Approximate val-
No. color
ues)

58 G/W Tail lamp switch Lighting switch OFF or AUTO , 1ST or 2ND 12V , 0V

More than 5
minutes after
ignition switch is 12V
turned to OFF
Ignition switch ON or START position
(with lighting , OFF position Within 5 min-
switch OFF or
59 PU/W Headlamp RH relay utes after igni-
1ST)
tion switch is 0V
turned to OFF
position

ON or START position 0V

Headlamps illuminate by auto light control. Less than 1V ,

(Operate , Not operate) 12V

Except PASS or 2ND position 12V

Lighting switch
PASS or 2ND position 0V
60 L Headlamp switch
Headlamps illuminate by auto light control. (Operate
10V , 12V
, Not operate)

64 B Ground — —

EL-380
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
Wiring Diagram — TRNSCV —

Wiring Diagram — TRNSCV — NAEL0411

MEL444P
IDX

EL-381
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NAEL0412

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE NAEL0412S01
SYMPTOM: Transmitter does not activate receiver.
Before conducting the procedure given below, make sure that sys-
tem receiver (garage door opener, etc.) operates with original,
hand-held transmitter. If NG, receiver or hand-held transmitter is at
fault, not vehicle related.
1 PRELIMINARY CHECK
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Does red light (LED) of transmitter illuminate when any button is pressed?

SEL442U

2 CHECK TRANSMITTER FUNCTION

Check transmitter with Tool.
For details, refer to Technical Service Bulletin.
OK or NG
OK © Receiver or handheld transmitter fault, not vehicle related.
NG © Replace transmitter with sun visor assembly.

3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY

1. Disconnect transmitter connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Check voltage between terminal 1 and body ground.

SEL358X

EL-382
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

4 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT GI

Check continuity between terminal 2 and ground.
MA

EC
SEL359X

5 CHECK MAIN POWER SUPPLY FOR SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT

MT
1. Disconnect smart entrance control unit.
2. Check voltage between smart entrance control unit harness connector M123 terminal 49 (G/R) and ground.
AT

AX
SEL284Y

IDX

EL-383
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

6 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR SMART ENTRANCE CONTROL UNIT

Check continuity between smart entrance control unit harness connector M122 terminal 43 (B) or M123 terminal 64 (B)
and ground.

SEL285Y

EL-384
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Component Parts and Harness Connetor Location

Component Parts and Harness Connetor GI

Location NAEL0413

CL
SEL357X

MT
NOTE:
If customer reports a “No Start” condition, request ALL KEYS
to be brought to the Dealer in case of an NVIS (NATS) malfunc- AT
tion.

IDX

EL-385
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
System Description

System Description =NAEL0414

NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System) has the following immobilizer functions:
I Since only NVIS (NATS) ignition keys, whose ID nos. have been registered into the ECM and IMMU of
NVIS (NATS), allow the engine to run, operation of a stolen vehicle without an NVIS (NATS) registered
key is prevented by NVIS (NATS).
That is to say, NVIS (NATS) will immobilise the engine if someone tries to start it without the registered
key of NVIS (NATS).
I All of the originally supplied ignition key IDs (except for card plate key) have been NVIS (NATS) regis-
tered.
If requested by the vehicle owner, a maximum of five key IDs can be registered into the NVIS (NATS)
components.
I The security indicator blinks when the ignition switch is in “OFF” or “ACC” position. Therefore, NVIS (NATS)
warns outsiders that the vehicle is equipped with the anti-theft system.
I When NVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lamp lights up while ignition key is in the “ON”
position.
I NVIS (NATS) trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of other NVIS (NATS)
ignition key IDs must be carried out using CONSULT-II hardware and CONSULT-II NVIS (NATS) software.
When NVIS (NATS) initialization has been completed, the ID of the inserted ignition key is automatically
NVIS (NATS) registered. Then, if necessary, additional registration of other NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs
can be carried out.
Regarding the procedures of NVIS (NATS) initialization and NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID registration, refer
to CONSULT-II operation manual, IVIS/NVIS.
I When servicing a malfunction of the NVIS (NATS) (indicated by lighting up of Security Indicator
Lamp) or registering another NVIS (NATS) ignition key ID no., it is necessary to re-register original
key identification. Therefore, be sure to receive ALL KEYS from vehicle owner.
System Composition NAEL0415
The immobiliser function of the NVIS (NATS) consists of the following:
I NVIS (NATS) ignition key
I NVIS (NATS) immobilizer control unit (IMMU) located in the ignition key cylinder
I Engine control module (ECM)
I Security indicator

SEL085WF

EL-386
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Wiring Diagram — NATS —

Wiring Diagram — NATS — NAEL0416

MEL559P
IDX

EL-387
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
CONSULT-II

CONSULT-II NAEL0417
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE NAEL0417S01
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Insert NVIS (NATS) program card into CONSULT-II.
Program card
NATS (AEN00A)
3. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector.

SEL331X

4. Turn ignition switch ON.

5. Touch “START”.

SEL943X

6. Select “NATS V.5.0”.

SEL851W

7. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service

procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation
Manual, IVIS/NVIS.

SEL363X

CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION NAEL0417S02

CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Description
MODE

C/U INITIALIZATION When replacing any of the following three components, C/U initialization and re-registration
of all NVIS (NATS) ignition keys are necessary.
[NVIS (NATS) ignition key/IMMU/ECM]

SELF-DIAG RESULTS Detected items (screen terms) are as shown in the chart EL-389.

EL-388
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)
NOTE: GI
I When any initialization is performed, all ID previously reg-
istered will be erased and all NVIS (NATS) ignition keys
must be registered again. MA
I The engine cannot be started with an unregistered key. In this
case, the system will show “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” or “LOCK
MODE” as a self-diagnostic result on the CONSULT-II screen. EM
I In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored as a
self-diagnostic result during key registration procedure, even if
the system is not malfunctioning. LC
HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS NAEL0417S03
EC

PD
SEL364X
AX
NVIS (NATS) SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM
CHART NAEL0417S04 SU
P No. Code Malfunction is detected when .....
(Self-diag-
Detected items (NATS program card BR
nostic Reference page
screen terms)
result of
“ENGINE”
ST
NATS MAL- The malfunction of ECM internal circuit of IMMU com-
ECM INT CIRC-IMMU FUNCTION munication line is detected. EL-393
P1613
RS
Communication impossible between ECM and IMMU
NATS MAL-
(In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU FUNCTION EL-394
P1612
during key registration procedure, even if the system is BT
not malfunctioning.)

NATS MAL- IMMU can receive the key ID signal but the result of ID
DIFFERENCE OF KEY FUNCTION verification between key ID and IMMU is NG. EL-398 HA
P1615

NATS MAL- IMMU cannot receive the key ID signal. SC

CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY FUNCTION EL-399
P1614

NATS MAL- The result of ID verification between IMMU and ECM is

ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM FUNCTION NG. System initialization is required. EL-400
P1611
IDX

EL-389
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
CONSULT-II (Cont’d)

P No. Code Malfunction is detected when .....

(Self-diag-
Detected items (NATS program card
nostic Reference page
screen terms)
result of
“ENGINE”

When the starting operation is carried out five or more

times consecutively under the following conditions,
NATS MAL-
NVIS (NATS) will shift the mode to one which prevents
LOCK MODE FUNCTION EL-403
the engine from being started.
P1610
I Unregistered ignition key is used.
I IMMU or ECM’s malfunctioning.

DON’T ERASE BEFORE All engine trouble codes except NVIS (NATS) trouble
— EL-391
CHECKING ENG DIAG code has been detected in ECM.

EL-390
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses

Trouble Diagnoses NAEL0418

GI
WORK FLOW NAEL0418S01

SEL004XA
IDX

EL-391
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 NAEL0418S02
(Self-diagnosis related item)
Displayed “SELF-DIAG DIAGNOSTIC PROCE- SYSTEM REFERENCE PART NO.
SYMPTOM RESULTS” on CON- DURE (Malfunctioning part or OF ILLUSTRATION ON
SULT-II screen. (Reference page) mode) NEXT PAGE

PROCEDURE 1
ECM INT CIRC-IMMU ECM B
(EL-393)

In rare case, “CHAIN

OF ECM-IMMU” might
be stored during key
—
registration procedure,
even if the system is
not malfunctioning.

Open circuit in battery

voltage line of IMMU C1
circuit

Open circuit in ignition

C2
line of IMMU circuit

Open circuit in ground

C3
line of IMMU circuit
PROCEDURE 2
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
(EL-394) Open circuit in commu-
nication line between C4
IMMU and ECM

Short circuit between

I Security indicator IMMU and ECM com-
lighting up* C4
munication line and bat-
I Engine cannot be tery voltage line
started.
Short circuit between
IMMU and ECM com-
C4
munication line and
ground line

ECM B

IMMU A

PROCEDURE 3 Unregistered key D

DIFFERENCE OF KEY
(EL-398) IMMU A

Malfunction of key ID
PROCEDURE 4 E
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY chip
(EL-399)
IMMU A

System initialization has

ID DISCORD, IMM- PROCEDURE 5 not yet been com- F
ECM (EL-400) pleted.

ECM F

PROCEDURE 7
LOCK MODE LOCK MODE D
(EL-403)

Engine trouble data and

I MIL staying ON DON’T ERASE
WORK FLOW NVIS (NATS) trouble
I Security indicator BEFORE CHECKING —
(EL-391) data have been
lighting up* ENG DIAG
detected in ECM

*: When NVIS (NATS) detects trouble, the security indicator lights up while ignition key is in the “ON” position.

EL-392
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2 NAEL0418S03
GI
(Non self-diagnosis related item)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE SYSTEM MA
SYMPTOM
(Reference page) (Malfunctioning part or mode)

Security ind.
EM
PROCEDURE 6 Open circuit between Fuse and IMMU
Security ind. does not light up.
(EL-401) Continuation of initialization mode
LC
IMMU

DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM NAEL0418S04

SEL087WF AX

SU
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 NAEL0418S05
Self-diagnostic results:
“ECM INT CIRC-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
BR
1. Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ECM INT CIRC-
IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen. Ref. part No. B. ST
2. Replace ECM.
3. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual RS
IVIS/NVIS”.

SEL365X BT

IDX

EL-393
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2 =NAEL0418S06
Self-diagnostic results:
“CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1 CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
NOTE:
In rare case, “CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU” might be stored during key registration procedure, even if the system is not mal-
functioning.

SEL366X

Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?

2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR IMMU

1. Disconnect IMMU connector.
2. Check voltage between terminal 8 of IMMU and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.

SEL302WD

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check the following
I 7.5A fuse (No. 62, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
I Harness for open or short between fuse and IMMU connector
Ref. Part No. C1

EL-394
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

3 CHECK IGN SW. ON SIGNAL GI

1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between terminal 7 of IMMU and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. MA

SEL303WF
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
CL
NG © Check the following
I 10A fuse [No. 16, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I Harness for open or short between fuse and IMMU connector MT
Ref. part No. C2

4 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR IMMU

AT
1. Turn ignition OFF.
2. Check harness continuity between IMMU terminal 4 and ground. TF

IDX

EL-395
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

5 CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE OPEN CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect ECM connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 116 and IMMU terminal 1.

SEL305WD

6 CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE BATTERY SHORT CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 116 or IMMU terminal 1 and ground.

SEL306WD

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Communication line is short-circuited with battery voltage line or ignition switch ON line.
Repair harness or connectors.
Ref. part No. C4

EL-396
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

7 CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE GROUND SHORT CIRCUIT GI

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check continuity between ECM terminal 116 or IMMU terminal 1 and ground. MA

SEL307WD
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
CL
NG © Communication line is short-circuited with ground line.
Repair harness or connectors.
Ref. part No. C4 MT

8 SIGNAL FROM ECM TO IMMU CHECK

AT
1. Check the signal between ECM terminal 116 and ground with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope when ignition switch is
turned “ON”.
2. Make sure signals which are shown in the figure below can be detected during 750 msec. just after ignition switch is TF
turned “ON”.

BR
SEL730W

OK or NG
ST
OK © IMMU is malfunctioning.
Replace IMMU. Ref. part No. A
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. RS
For the operation of initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual IVIS/NVIS”.
NG © ECM is malfunctioning.
Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B BT
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For the operation of initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual IVIS/NVIS”.
HA

IDX

EL-397
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3 =NAEL0418S07
Self-diagnostic results:
“DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1 CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “DIFFERENCE OF KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen.

SEL367X

Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?

2 PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II

Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs.
For initialization and registration of NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual NVIS/NVIS”.

SEL297W
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows above message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized and can the engine be started with re-registered NVIS (NATS) ignition key?
Yes © Ignition key ID was unregistered. Ref. part No. D
No © IMMU is malfunctioning.
Replace IMMU. Ref. part No. A
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual IVIS/NVIS”.

EL-398
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 =NAEL0418S08
GI
Self-diagnostic results:
“CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1 CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
MA
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY” displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
EM

FE
SEL368X

Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?

2 CHECK NVIS (NATS) IGNITION KEY ID CHIP AT

Start engine with another registered NVIS (NATS) ignition key.
Does the engine start? TF
Yes © Ignition key ID chip is malfunctioning.
Replace the ignition key.
Ref. part No. E PD
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual IVIS/NVIS”.
AX
No © GO TO 3.

3 CHECK IMMU INSTALLATION

SU
Check IMMU installation.
Refer to “How to Replace IMMU” in EL-404. BR
OK or NG
OK © IMMU is malfunctioning. ST
Replace IMMU. Ref. part No. A
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual IVIS/NVIS”. RS
NG © Reinstall IMMU correctly.

IDX

EL-399
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5 =NAEL0418S09
Self-diagnostic results:
“ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1 CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM” displayed on CONSULT-II screen.

SEL369X
NOTE:
“ID DISCORD IMMU-ECM”:
Registered ID of IMMU is in discord with that of ECM.
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © GO TO SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1.

2 PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II

Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual IVIS/NVIS”.

SEL297W
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows above message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized?
Yes © Start engine. (END)
(System initialization had not been completed. Ref. part No. F)
No © ECM is malfunctioning.
Replace ECM. Ref. part No. F
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual IVIS/NVIS”.

EL-400
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6 =NAEL0418S10
GI
“SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
1 CHECK FUSE
MA
Check 10A fuse [No. 12, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
Is 10A fuse OK?
EM
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Replace fuse.
LC
2 CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP
1. Install 10A fuse.
EC
2. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II Operation Manual IVIS/NVIS”.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF.
FE
4. Start engine and turn ignition switch OFF.
5. Check the security indicator lamp lighting.
Security indicator lamp should be blinking. CL
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END MT
NG © GO TO 3.
AT
3 CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect security indicator lamp connector. TF
2. Check voltage between security indicator lamp connector terminal 1 and ground.

BR
SEL370XA

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
ST
NG © Check harness for open or short between fuse and security indicator lamp.
RS
4 CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP
Check security Indicator Lamp. BT
Is security indicator lamp OK?
Yes © GO TO 5. HA
No © Replace security indicator lamp.

IDX

EL-401
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

5 CHECK IMMU FUNCTION

1. Connect IMMU connector.
2. Disconnect security indicator lamp connector.
3. Check continuity between IMMU terminal 5 and ground.

SEL300WC

OK or NG
OK © Check harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and IMMU.
NG © IMMU is malfunctioning.
Replace IMMU.
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual IVIS/NVIS”.

EL-402
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7 =NAEL0418S11
GI
Self-diagnostic results:
“LOCK MODE” displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1 CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
MA
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS “LOCK MODE” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
EM

FE
SEL371X

Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as above?

2 ESCAPE FROM LOCK MODE AT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn ignition switch ON with registered key. (Do not start engine.) Wait 5 seconds.
3. Return the key to OFF position.
TF
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 twice (total of three cycles).
5. Start the engine.
PD
Does engine start?
Yes © System is OK.
(Now system is escaped from “LOCK MODE”.) AX
No © GO TO 3.
SU
3 CHECK IMMU ILLUSTRATION
Check IMMU installation. Refer to “How to Replace IMMU” in EL-404. BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. ST
NG © Reinstall IMMU correctly.

IDX

EL-403
NVIS (NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM — NATS)
Trouble Diagnoses (Cont’d)

4 PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II

Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to “CONSULT-II operation manual IVIS/NVIS”.

SEL297W
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows the above message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized?
Yes © System is OK.
No © GO TO DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 to check “CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY”, refer to
EL-399.

How to Replace NVIS (NATS) IMMU NAEL0419

NOTE:
I If NVIS (NATS) IMMU is not installed correctly, NVIS
(NATS) system will not operate properly and SELF-DIAG
RESULTS on CONSULT-II screen will show “LOCK
MODE”.

SEL096WA

EL-404
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Component Parts Location

Component Parts Location NAEL0420

SEL508X SC

IDX

EL-405
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description

System Description =NAEL0421

OUTLINE NAEL0421S01
The Navigation System (Multi-AV System) relies upon three sens-
ing devices in order to determine vehicle location at regular time
intervals.
1. Vehicle speed sensor: Determines the distance the vehicle has
traveled.
2. Gyro (Angular velocity sensor): Determines vehicle steering
angle and directional change.
3. GPS antenna (GPS data): Determines vehicle forward move-
SEL683V
ment and direction.
The data provided by the three sensing functions together with a
comparison of the mapping information read from the CD-ROM
drive permit accurate determination of the vehicle’s current location
and subsequent course (map matching). The information appears
on a liquid crystal display.
This comparison of GPS data (vehicle position sensing) and map
matching permits precise determination of vehicle location.

Position Sensor Operating Principles NAEL0421S0101

The sensor determines current vehicle location by calculating the
previously sensed position, the distance traveled from this position,
and the directional changes occurring during this travel.
1. Distance traveled
The distance traveled is calculated using signals received from
the vehicle speed sensor. The sensor automatically compen-
sates for the slightly reduced wheel and tire diameter resulting
from tire wear.
2. Forward movement (Direction)
SEL684V Changes in the direction of forward movement are calculated
by the gyro (angular velocity sensor) and the GPS antenna
(GPS data). Each of these functions has its advantage and
disadvantages. Depending upon conditions, one function takes
precedence over the other to accurately determine the direc-
tion of forward movement.
Function type Advantage Disadvantage

Gyro (Angular I Able to accurately detect I Calculation errors may

velocity sen- minute changes in steering accumulate over a long
sor) angle and direction. period of continuous
vehicle travel.

GPS antenna I Able to sense vehicle travel I Unable to detect direction

(GPS data) in four general directions of vehicle travel at low
(North, South, East, and vehicle speeds.
West)

EL-406
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
Map Matching NAEL0421S0102 GI
Map matching allows the driver to compare the sensed vehicle
location data with the road map contained in the CD-ROM drive.
Vehicle position is marked on the CD-ROM map. This permits the MA
driver to accurately determine his/her present position on the high-
way and to make appropriate course decisions.
When GPS data reception is poor during travel, the vehicle posi- EM
tion is not amended. At this time, manual manipulation of the CD-
ROM map position marker is required.
LC
SEL685V

Map matching permits the driver to make priority judgments about EC

possible appropriate roads other than the one currently being trav-
eled.
If there is an error in the distance or direction of travel, there will FE
also be an error in the relative position of other routes. When two
routes are closely parallel to one another, the indicated position for
both routes will be nearly the same priority. This is so that, slight CL
changes in the steering direction may cause the marker to indicate
both routes alternately.
MT
SEL686V
AT
Newly constructed roads may not appear on the CD-ROM map. In
this case, map matching is not possible. Changes in the course of
a road will also prevent accurate map matching. TF
When driving on a road not shown on the CD-ROM map, the posi-
tion marker used for map matching may indicate a different route.
Even after returning to a route shown on the map, the position PD
marker may jump to the position currently detected.

SEL687V SU
GPS (Global Positioning System) NAEL0421S0103
GPS is the global positioning system developed and operated by
the US Department of Defense. GPS satellites (NAVSTAR) trans-
BR
mit radio waves and orbit around the earth at an altitude of approxi-
mately 21,000 km (13,000 miles). ST
GPS receiver calculates the three-dimensional position of the
vehicle (latitude, longitude, and altitude from the sea level) by the
time difference of the radio wave arriving from more than four GPS RS
satellites (three-dimensional positioning).
When the radio wave is received from only three GPS satellites, the
two-dimensional position (latitude and longitude) is calculated, BT
SEL526V
using the altitude from the sea level data calculated by using four
GPS satellites (two-dimensional positioning).
Positioning capability is degraded in the following cases. HA
I In two-dimensional positioning, when the vehicle’s altitude
from the sea level changes, the precision becomes lower.
I The location detection performance can have an error of about SC
100 m (300 ft) even in three-dimensional positioning with high
precision. Because the precision is influenced by the location
of GPS satellites used for positioning, the location detection
performance may drop depending on the location of GPS sat-
ellites.
I When the radio wave from GPS satellites cannot be received,
IDX

EL-407
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
for example, when the vehicle is in a tunnel, in a parking lot
inside building, under an elevated superhighway or near strong
power lines, the location may not be detected. Turbulent/
electric weather conditions may also affect positioning perfor-
mance. If something is placed on the antenna, the radio wave
from GPS satellites may not be received.

COMPONENT DESCRIPTION NAEL0421S02

Display & NAVI Control Unit NAEL0421S0201
I The gyro (angular speed sensor) and the CD-ROM drive are
built-in units that control the navigation functions.
I Signals are received from the gyro, the vehicle speed sensor,
and the GPS antenna. Vehicle location is determined by com-
bining this data with the data contained in the CD-ROM map.
Locational information is shown on liquid crystal display panel.
I Finger-operated touch switches are positioned on the liquid
crystal display panel for easy operation.
SEL688V I The touch switches used to control the equipment are beneath
a glass sheet and two resistance membranes at the top of the
liquid crystal display panel. The switches are sensitive to resis-
tance value where touched with your finger to detect operat-
ing status.

CD-ROM Driver NAEL0421S0202

Maps, traffic control regulations, and other pertinent information
can be easily red from the CD-ROM disc.
NOTE:
I When removing the CD-ROM, allow it to remain open until the
liquid crystal display locks.
I The liquid crystal display must be closed when the vehicle is
running.
I Do not place cups, cans or other containers containing liquids
on top of the liquid crystal display.
SEL689V
Map CD-ROM NAEL0421S0203
I The map CD-ROM has maps, traffic control regulations, and
other pertinent information.
I To improve CD-ROM map matching and route determination
functions, the CD-ROM uses an exclusive Nissan format.
Therefore, the use of a CD-ROM provided by other manufac-
turers cannot be used.

EL-408
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
Gyro (Angular Speed Sensor) NAEL0421S0204 GI
I The oscillator gyro sensor is used to detect changes in vehicle
steering angle.
I The oscillator gyro periodically senses oscillatory variation at MA
the oscillation terminals. This variation is caused by changes
in the vehicle angular velocity. Voltage variations are sensed
by ceramic voltage sensors at the left and right sides of the EM
terminals. Vehicle angular velocity corresponds directly with
these changes in voltage.
I The gyro is built into the display & navigation (NAVI) control
LC
SEL690V unit.
BIRDVIEWT EC
NAEL0421S0205
T
The BIRDVIEW provides a detailed and easily seen display of
road conditions covering the vehicle’s immediate to distant area.
FE

MT
MAP DISPLAY
AT

AX
BIRDVIEW R
SEL636X SU
Description NAEL0421S0206
I Display area: Trapezoidal representation showing approximate
distances (Wn, D, and Wd).
BR
I Ten horizontal grid lines indicate display width while six verti-
cal grid lines indicate display depth and direction. ST
I Drawing line area shows open space, depth, and immediate
front area. Each area is to a scale of approximately 5:6:25.
I When the “ZM−” button is pushed, the view point height is RS
increased. Pushing the “ZM+” button decreases the height.
Pushing the “ZM−” button or the “ZM+” button during operation
indicates the scale change and the view point height at the BT
left-hand side of the screen.
HA

IDX
SEL691V

EL-409
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
FUNCTION OF TOUCH SWITCH (SUMMARY) =NAEL0421S03
Display with Pushed “MAP” Switch NAEL0421S0301

SEL475Y

The function of each touch switch is as follows:

1) Azimuth indication
2) Position marker
The tip of the arrow shows the current position. The shaft of
the arrow indicates the direction in which the vehicle is travel-
ing.
3) GPS reception signal (indicates current reception conditions)
4) Distance display (shows the distance in a reduced scale)
5) Current location voice information
(this information is available when the route guide is being
activated and the designated route is being traveled.)
6) Switch display from map screen to BIRDVIEWT screen
(change to map screen on display when the BIRDVIEWT is
being used.)
7) The following items can be set.
I Save Current Location
I Edit Address Book
I Guide Volume
I System Setting
8) The route guide operation can be canceled.

EL-410
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
Display with Pushed “DEST” Switch =NAEL0421S0302
GI

SEL581X MT
The function of each touch switch is as follows:
AT
Icon Description

Address Book Favorite place can be saved to memory.

The destination can be selected from the memory. TF
Address/Street The destination can be searched from the address.

Point of Interest (POI) The destination of favorite facility can be searched.

PD
Previous Dest. The previous ten destinations stored in memory are
displayed. AX
Intersection The destination from the intersection name can be
retrieved.
SU
City The destination can be searched from city name.

Map The destination can be searched from the map. BR

IDX

EL-411
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description (Cont’d)
Display with Toutch Screen NAEL0421S0303

SEL476Y

The function of each touch switch is as follows:

Icon Description

Quick Stop The selected facility is set as the destination or way-

point. (Route guidance has been turned OFF or the
destination has been reached.)

Where am I? Next, current and previous street names can be dis-

played.

Route Info.* The following items can be set.

I Complete Route
I Turn List
I Route Simulation
(Displayed only when the destination area has been
set.)

Detour* Based on the selected distance, an alternative route is

searched. [Displayed only when the recommended
route (not its reverse) is followed.]

Edit Route* Change the destination or add the transit points of the
route set in the route guide. (Displayed only when the
automatic reroute function has been turned OFF and
the recommended route is not followed.)

Route Calc. Search for a recommended route between the vehi-

cle’s current location and the destination area. (Dis-
played only when the destination area has been set.)

*: When destinations have been entered, route guidance has been turned OFF or
destination has been reached, “Route Info.”, “Detour” and “Edit Route” are not
displayed.

EL-412
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Schematic

Schematic NAEL0422
GI

MEL270N
IDX

EL-413
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — NAVI —

Wiring Diagram — NAVI — NAEL0423

MEL878N

EL-414
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — NAVI — (Cont’d)

MEL272N

IDX

EL-415
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — NAVI — (Cont’d)

MEL270M

EL-416
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Self-diagnosis Mode

Self-diagnosis Mode NAEL0424

GI
APPLICATION ITEMS NAEL0424S01

Reference MA
Mode Description
page

Self-diagnosis for display & NAVI control unit, CD-ROM EM

Self Diagnosis EL-418
and GPS antenna connection.

Display Diagnosis Color and gray gradation of display can be checked in

EL-426
this mode. LC
Diagnostic Signals from the Car Several input signals to display & NAVI control unit, can
EL-424
be monitored in this mode.
EC
Check the map CD- The version (parts number) of inserted CD-ROM can be
EL-425
ROM version checked in this mode.
FE
History of errors Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory
(before turning ignition switch ON) are displayed in this
EL-420
mode. Time and location when/where the errors
occurred are also displayed.
CL
Longitude & Latitude Display the map. Use the joystick to adjust position. Lon-
Confirmation/ EL-427
gitude and latitude will be displayed. MT
adjustment
Adjust the angle Turning angle of the vehicle on the display can be
EL-428
Navigation adjusted in this mode.
AT
Under ordinary conditions, the navigation system dis-
tance measuring function will automatically compensate
for minute decreases in wheel and tire diameter caused TF
Speed Calibration by tire wear or low pressure. Speed calibration immedi- EL-429
ately restores system accuracy in cases such as when
distance calibration is needed because of the use of tire PD
chains in inclement weather.

Initialize Location This mode is for initializing the current location. Use
when the vehicle is transported a long distance on a EL-454 AX
trailer, etc.

SU
HOW TO PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE NAEL0424S02
1. Start the engine.
BR
2. Push both of “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for
more than 5 seconds.
ST

SEL583X BT
3. Touch “Self Diagnosis” or “Confirmation/ adjustment”.
I For further procedure, refer to the following pages which HA
describe each application item of the self-diagnosis mode.

IDX
SEL584X

EL-417
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Self-diagnosis Mode (Cont’d)
“Self Diagnosis” NAEL0424S0201
1. Start the engine.
2. Push both “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
3. Touch “Self Diagnosis”.

SEL584X

4. Self-diagnosis will be performed.

SEL585X

5. Diagnosis results will be displayed. Diagnosis results are indi-

cated by display color. For details refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSIS
RESULTS”.

SEL586X

To obtain detailed diagnosis results on the screen, touch “Naviga-

tion” or “GPS Antenna”.

SEL587X

EL-418
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Self-diagnosis Mode (Cont’d)
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS =NAEL0424S03
GI
Diagnoses/service procedure
Recheck system at each check or
Diagnosed Displayed
Detailed result Description replacement (When malfunction is
MA
item color
eliminated, further repair work is
not required.)
EM
GPS antenna is connected to dis-
Green — —
play & NAVI control unit correctly.
“GPS 1. Check GPS antenna feeder cable
LC
Antenna” connection at display & NAVI
(GPS Connection to the follow-
control unit.
antenna con- Yellow ing unit is abnormal. See GPS antenna connection error is
2. Visually check GPS antenna EC
nection) the Service Manual for detected.
feeder cable. If NG, replace GPS
further diagnosis.
antenna assembly.
3. Replace GPS antenna. FE
Green — No failure is detected. —

Display & NAVI control unit is mal- CL

Red [*** is abnormal.] Replace display & NAVI control unit.
functioning.

Self-diagnosis for CD- 1. Confirm that map CD-ROM is not MT

ROM DRIVER of DISP & Any CD-ROM is not inserted or dis- inserted into display & NAVI con-
Gray NAVI was not conducted play & NAVI control unit is malfunc- trol unit.
due to no insertion of tioning. 2. Replace display & NAVI control
CD-ROM. unit.
AT
1. Confirm the disk is installed cor-
CD-ROM or CD-ROM Display & NAVI control unit judges
DRIVER of DISP & NAVI that inserted CD-ROM is malfunc-
rectly (not up side down.) TF
2. Perform “CHECK THE MAP CD-
“Navigation” is abnormal. See the tioning.
ROM VERSION” in EL-425 to
(Display & Service Manual for fur- Map CD-ROM or CD-ROM driver of
NAVI control ther diagnosis. the unit is malfunctioning.
confirm whether correct CD-ROM PD
is inserted or not.
unit) 3. Check the disk surface. Are there
any scratches, abrasions or pits
Inserted map CD-ROM can not be
on the surface?
AX
CD-ROM is abnormal. read.
Yellow 4. Replace the CD-ROM.
Please check the disc. Map CD-ROM or CD-ROM driver of
5. Replace display & NAVI control
the unit is malfunctioning.
unit. SU
1. Check GPS antenna feeder cable
Connection to the follow-
connection at display & NAVI BR
control unit.
ing unit is abnormal. See GPS antenna connection error is
2. Visually check GPS antenna
the Service Manual for detected.
feeder cable. If NG, replace GPS
further diagnosis.
antenna assembly.
ST
3. Replace GPS antenna.

IDX

EL-419
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode

Confirmation/Adjustment Mode =NAEL0425

“HISTORY OF ERRORS” MODE NAEL0425S01
Description NAEL0425S0101
In this mode, historical errors of the system are displayed with the
following data.
I How many times the error was detected
I The last time data when the error was detected
I The last place where the error was detected
NOTE:
I The number of errors can be counted up to 50 times. More
than 51 times will be indicated as 50 times.
I Malfunction of the GPS board (inside the display & NAVI
control unit) will result in the display of incorrect time
data.
I When an error occurs, an incorrect position marker
appears on the display. The accuracy of the display data
(position marker) will be affected.

How to Perform NAEL0425S0102

1. Start the engine.
2. Push both “MAP” and “D/N” switch at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
3. Touch “Confirmation/ adjustment”.

SEL584X

4. Touch “Navigation”.

SEL588X

5. Touch “Error history”.

SEL453Y

EL-420
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
6. If trouble items are displayed with time count, repair/replace GI
the system according to “HISTORY OF ERRORS” TABLE,
EL-422.
7. If necessary, touch error item to display the time when the error MA
was detected and the place where the error was detected.
8. After repairing the system, erase the diagnosis memory.
NOTE: EM
When the display & NAVI control unit must be replaced, do not
erase the diagnosis memory for further inspection of malfunc-
tions.
LC
SEL590X a. Start the engine.
b. Push both “Map” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more EC
than 5 seconds.
c. Touch “Confirmation/ adjustment”.
d. Touch “Navigation”. FE
e. Touch “Error history”.
f. Touch “Delete”. CL
g. Touch “Yes”.

IDX

EL-421
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
“HISTORY OF ERRORS” TABLE =NAEL0425S02

Refer-
Detected items Description Diagnosis/service procedure ence
page

Perform self-diagnosis to confirm

whether the display & NAVI control unit
Communications malfunction between is malfunctioning or not. If no failure is
Gyro sensor disconnected display & NAVI control unit and internal detected, a momentary and/or tempo- EL-417
gyro rary malfunction may have been caused
by strong electromagnetic wave interfer-
ence.

Check vehicle speed sensor signal in

“DIAGNOSTIC SIGNALS FROM THE
Connection problem of speed Input malfunction of display & NAVI con- CAR” mode. If the input signal is not
EL-424
sensor trol unit and speed sensor detected correctly, check harness for
open or short between combination
meter and display & NAVI control unit.

GPS disconnected Perform self-diagnosis to confirm

whether the display & NAVI control unit
Communications malfunction between is malfunctioning or not. If no failure is
GPS transmission cable malfunc-
display & NAVI control unit and GPS detected, a momentary and/or tempo- EL-417
tion
board rary malfunction may have been caused
by strong electromagnetic wave interfer-
GPS input line connection error ence.

The transmission circuit of the GPS A location error occurs. Strong electro-
GPS TCXO over
board frequency synchronization oscilla- magnetic wave interference may have
tor (inside the display & NAVI control occurred. The GPS antenna may be in a —
unit) is sending an oscillation frequency very hot or very cold environment. This
GPS TCXO under
that is greater or less than the set value. is usually a temporary malfunction.

GPS ROM malfunction Perform self-diagnosis to confirm

Internal malfunction of GPS board RAM
whether the display & NAVI control unit
or ROM inside the display & NAVI con-
is malfunctioning or not. If no failure is
GPS RAM malfunction trol unit.
detected, a momentary and/or tempo- EL-417
rary malfunction may have been caused
Malfunction of GPS board clock IC by strong electromagnetic wave interfer-
GPS RTC malfunction
inside the display & NAVI control unit. ence.

Perform self-diagnosis to confirm GPS

antenna connection. If no failure is
GPS antenna disconnected — detected, a momentary and/or tempo- EL-425
rary malfunction may have been caused
by a strong impact.

1. Check power supply circuits for dis-

EL-438
play & NAVI control unit.

2. Perform self-diagnosis to confirm

Power supply voltage for GPS board EL-417
GPS antenna connection.
Low voltage of GPS inside the display & NAVI control unit is
low. 3. If above diagnosis results are OK, a
momentary and/or temporary malfunc-
—
tion may have been caused by a strong
impact.

Perform self-diagnosis to confirm

whether the display & NAVI control unit
is malfunctioning or not. If no failure is
CD-ROM driver malfunction (inside the
CD-ROM communication error detected, a momentary and/or tempo- EL-417
display & NAVI control unit)
rary malfunction may have been caused
by strong electromagnetic wave interfer-
ence.

EL-422
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)

Refer- GI
Detected items Description Diagnosis/service procedure ence
page
MA
Check that whether the disc can be
inserted and ejected correctly. If the
Loading mechanism malfunction — loading function does not operate —
correctly, replace NAVI & display control
EM
unit.

It is confirmed that the appropriate CD- LC

CD-ROM reading error ROM disc is positioned in the CD-ROM Perform self-diagnosis to confirm
loader. However, no data can be read. whether the inserted disc is malfunction- EL-417
Malfunctioning of error correction Erroneous data is read from the CD- ing or not. EC
for CD-ROM ROM. The errors cannot be corrected.

CD-ROM focus error

CD-ROM data reading beam is out of Rough road driving might create CD
—
FE
focus. skipping like music CD audio unit.

Perform self-diagnosis to confirm

CD-ROM malfunction — whether the inserted disc is malfunction- EL-417
CL
ing or not.

IDX

EL-423
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
“DIAGNOSTIC SIGNALS FROM THE CAR” MODE =NAEL0425S03
Description NAEL0425S0301
In “Diagnostic Signals From the Car” mode, following input signals
to the display & NAVI control unit can be checked on the display.
Item Indication Vehicle condition

Vehicle ON Vehicle speed is greater than 0 km/h (0 MPH).

Speed* OFF Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH).

ON Lighting switch is in 1st or 2nd position.

Light
OFF Lighting switch is in “OFF” position.

ON Ignition switch is in “ON” position.

IGN
OFF Ignition switch is in “ACC” position.

ON Selector/shift lever is in “Reverse” position.

REVERSE* Selector/shift lever is in other than “Reverse” posi-
OFF
tion.

*: When ignition switch is in “ACC” position, indication will be changed to “-”.

How to Perform NAEL0425S0302

1. Start the engine.
2. Push both “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
3. Touch “Confirmation/ adjustment”.

SEL584X

4. Touch “Diagnostic Signals from the Car”.

SEL588X

5. Then “Diagnostic Signals from the Car” mode is performed.

SEL591X

EL-424
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
“CHECK THE MAP CD-ROM VERSION” MODE =NAEL0425S04 GI
How to Perform NAEL0425S0401
1. Start the engine.
2. Push both “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more
MA
than 5 seconds.
3. Touch “Confirmation/ adjustment”. EM

LC
SEL584X

4. Touch “Navigation”. EC

MT
SEL588X
AT
5. Touch “Check the map CD-ROM version”.

SEL589X SU
6. The version (parts number) of CD-ROM loaded to the display
and NAVI control unit will be displayed.
BR

SEL592X BT

IDX

EL-425
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
“DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS” MODE =NAEL0425S05
Description NAEL0425S0501
Use the “Diagnosis Display” mode to check the display color bright-
ness and shading. The display & NAVI control unit must be
replaced if the color brightness and shading are abnormal.

How to Perform NAEL0425S0502

1. Start the engine.
2. Push both “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
3. Touch “Confirmation/ adjustment”.

SEL584X

4. Touch “Display Diagnosis”.

SEL588X

5. Touch “Display color spectrum bar” or “Display gradation bar”.

6. Then color bar/gray scale will be displayed.

SEL454Y

SEL455Y

EL-426
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
“LONGITUDE & LATITUDE” MODE NAEL0425S06
GI
Description NAEL0425S0601
The “Longitude & Latitude” is used to confirm the longitude and
latitude of some optional area point. MA

How to Perform EC
NAEL0425S0602
1. Start the engine.
2. Push both “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more FE
than 5 seconds.
3. Touch “Confirmation/ adjustment”.
CL

MT
SEL584X
AT
4. Touch “Navigation”.

SEL588X SU
5. Touch “Longitude & Latitude”.
BR

SEL589X BT
6. Adjust the pointer with using the joystick and touch “Set”.
7. The longitude and latitude are displayed. HA

IDX
SEL595X

EL-427
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
“ADJUST THE ANGLE” MODE =NAEL0425S07
Description NAEL0425S0701
If the display indicates a larger or smaller turning angle than the
actual turning angle, the gyro (angular speed sensor) sensing val-
ues must be checked.
In case that the vehicle on the display makes larger angle turn than
reality, touch “−”. In case that the vehicle on the display makes
smaller angle turn than reality, touch “+”.

How to Perform NAEL0425S0702

1. Start the engine.
2. Push both “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.
3. Touch “Confirmation/ adjustment”.

SEL584X

4. Touch “Navigation”.

SEL588X

5. Touch “Adjust the angle”.

SEL453Y

6. Touch “Left Turn” to adjust the angle to the left. Touch “Right
Turn” to adjust the angle to the right.
7. Touch “+” to increase the angle change coefficient or “−” to
reduce the angle change coefficient.
8. Touch “Set” to save the changed values in memory.
9. Then the vehicle turning angle on the display has adjusted.

SEL456Y

EL-428
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Confirmation/Adjustment Mode (Cont’d)
SPEED CALIBRATION =NAEL0425S08 GI
1. Start the engine.
2. Push both “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more
than 5 seconds. MA
3. Touch “Confirmation/ adjustment”.
4. Touch “Navigation”. EM

LC
SEL584X

5. Touch “Speed Calibration”. EC

MT
SEL453Y
AT
6. Touch “+” or “−” to adjust the distance change coefficient.
I To make the distance change coefficient smaller, touch “−”.
I To make the distance change coefficient larger, touch “+”. TF
7. Touch “Set”.
PD

SEL457Y SU

IDX

EL-429
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Setting Mode

Setting Mode =NAEL0426

APPLICATION ITEMS NAEL0426S01

Mode Description Reference page

GPS Information The GPS includes longtitude, latitude and altitude (distance above sea level) of the
present vehicle position, and current date and time for the area in which the vehicle is
EL-430
being driven.
Also indicated are the GPS reception conditions and the GPS satellite position.

Quick Stop Customer One facility of your selection can be added to your Quick Stop.
EL-433
Setting

Route Priorities Priorities of search request and automatic re-searching can be set for route search. EL-434

Tracking Tracking to the present vehicle position can be displayed. EL-435

Display Setting The following display settings can be customized.

I Display color (Day mode or Night mode) EL-432
I Brightness of display

Heading Heading of the map display can be customized for either north heading or the actual
EL-435
driving direction of the vehicle.

Nearby Display Icons Icons of facilities can be displayed.

EL-436
Facilities to be displayed can be selected from the variety of selections.

Adjust Current Loca- Current location of position marker can be adjusted. Direction of position marker also
tion can be calibrated when heading direction of the vehicle on the display is not matched EL-431
with the actual direction.

Avoid Area Setting Particular area can be avoided when routing. —

Beep On/Off Beep sounds which correspond to the system operation can be activated/deactivated. EL-432

Clear Memory Address book, Previous destination or Avoid area can be deleted. EL-436

HOW TO PERFORM CONTROL PANEL MODE NAEL0426S02

1. Start the engine.
2. Push “MAP” switch.
I For further procedures, refer to the following pages which
describe each application item of the control panel mode.

SEL597X

“GPS INFORMATION” SETTING NAEL0426S03

1. Start the engine.
2. Push “MAP” switch.
3. Touch “Setting”.

SEL598X

EL-430
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Setting Mode (Cont’d)
4. Touch “System Setting”. GI

LC
SEL461Y

5. Touch “GPS Information”. EC

MT
SEL462Y
AT
6. Then GPS information will be displayed.

SEL146W SU
“ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” SETTING NAEL0426S04
1. Start the engine.
BR
2. Push “MAP” switch.
3. Touch “Setting”.
4. Touch “System Setting”. ST

SEL460Y BT
5. Touch “Adjust Current Location”.
HA

IDX
SEL463Y

EL-431
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Setting Mode (Cont’d)
6. Touch “ ” or “ ” to calibrate the heading direction. (Arrow
marks will rotate corresponding to the calibration key.)
7. Touch “Set”. Then the vehicle mark will be matched to the
arrow mark.
8. Display will show “Heading direction has been calibrated” and
then go back to the current location map.

SEL602X

BEEP ON/OFF SETTING NAEL0426S05

1. Start the engine.
2. Push “MAP” switch.
3. Touch “Setting”.
4. Touch “System Setting”.

SEL460Y

5. Touch “Beep on/off”.

SEL463Y

6. Touch “On” or “Off” icon.

I If you want the beep sound, select “ON”.
I If you do not want the beep sound, select “OFF”.
7. Push “MAP” switch, then the display will go back to the current
location map.

SEL464Y

DISPLAY SETTING NAEL0426S06

Description NAEL0426S0601
The following display setting can be changed in this mode.
I Dimmer operation (when lighting switch is turned on.)
I Display color (Day mode or Night mode)
I Brightness of display

EL-432
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Setting Mode (Cont’d)
DISPLAY COLOR SETTING NAEL0426S07 GI
1. Start the engine.
2. Push “MAP” switch.
3. Touch “Setting”. MA
4. Touch “System Setting”.
5. Touch “Color”. Display color will change to Day mode/Night EM
mode.
6. Touch “Previous”.
NOTE: LC
SEL465Y
I Display color can be changed independently when light-
ing switch is turned on and off.
I Initial setting of the color is as follows:
EC
When lighting switch is turned off: Day mode
When lighting switch is turned on: Night mode FE
Day mode: White background
Night mode: Black background
CL

AT
BRIGHTNESS SETTING NAEL0426S08
1. Start the engine.
2. Push “MAP” switch. TF
3. Touch “Setting”.
4. Touch “System Setting”. PD
5. Touch “Display Setting”.
6. Touch “Bright” or “Dark” to adjust the brightness of display.
7. Touch “Previous”. AX
NOTE:
Display brightness can be adjusted independently when light-
SEL465Y
ing switch is turned on and off.
SU

BT
“QUICK STOP CUSTOMER SETTING” MODE NAEL0426S09
1. Start the engine. HA
2. Push the “MAP” switch.
3. Touch “Setting”.
SC
4. Touch “System Setting”.

IDX
SEL460Y

EL-433
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Setting Mode (Cont’d)
5. Touch “Quick Stop Customer Setting”.

SEL462Y

6. Select from the itemized list.

SEL466Y

“ROUTE PRIORITIES” MODE NAEL0426S10

1. Start the engine.
2. Push the “MAP” switch.
3. Touch “Setting”.
4. Touch “System Setting”.

SEL460Y

5. Touch “Route Priorities”.

SEL467Y

6. Select from the itemized list.

SEL468Y

EL-434
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Setting Mode (Cont’d)
“TRACKING” MODE NAEL0426S11 GI
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the “MAP” switch.
3. Touch “Setting”. MA
4. Touch “System Setting”.
EM

LC
SEL460Y

5. Touch “Tracking”. EC

MT
SEL467Y
AT
6. Touch the “On” or “Off” icon.
I If you don’t need a trail on the map, select “Off”.
I If you need a trail on the map, select “On”. TF
7. Push the “MAP” switch to return the display to the current
location map.
PD
NOTE:
When a trail display is turned OFF, trail data is erased from the
memory. AX

SEL470Y SU
“HEADING” MODE NAEL0426S12
1. Start the engine.
BR
2. Push the “MAP” switch.
3. Touch “Setting”.
4. Touch “System Setting”. ST

SEL460Y BT
5. Touch “Heading”.
HA

IDX
SEL467Y

EL-435
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Setting Mode (Cont’d)
6. Touch the “Heading up” or “North up” icon.
I To display North up, select “North up”.
I To display the car heading up, select “Heading up”.
7. Push the “MAP” switch, then the display will go back to the
current location map.

SEL470Y

“NEARBY DISPLAY ICONS” MODE NAEL0426S13

1. Start the engine.
2. Push the “MAP” switch.
3. Touch “Setting”.
4. Touch “System Setting”.

SEL460Y

5. Touch “Nearby Display Icons”.

SEL463Y

6. Select and touch the itemized list.

7. Push the “MAP” switch to return the display to the current
location map.

SEL471Y

“CLEAR MEMORY” MODE NAEL0426S14

1. Start the engine.
2. Push the “MAP” switch.
3. Touch “Setting”.
4. Touch “System Setting”.

SEL460Y

EL-436
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Setting Mode (Cont’d)
5. Touch “Clear Memory”. GI

LC
SEL462Y

6. To delete all the stored places in the “Address Book”, “Avoid EC

Area” and “Previous Dest.”, select “Yes”.
FE

MT
SEL472Y
AT
“MAP & A/C” MODE NAEL0426S15
1. Start the engine.
2. Push “MAP” switch. TF
3. Touch “Setting”.
4. Touch “System Setting”. PD

SEL460Y SU
5. Touch “MAP & A/C”.
BR

SEL462Y BT
6. Touch “Map & A/C” or “Map” icon.
I To set the split display with both the map and the air condi- HA
tioner information as the initial setting of the NAVI system,
select “MAP & A/C”.
I To set the map only display as the initial setting of the NAVI SC
system, select “MAP”.
7. Push “MAP” switch, then the display will go back to the current
location map.
NOTE:
When the enlarged view is displayed, the air conditioner control IDX
SEL474Y screen will not be displayed.

EL-437
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Trouble diagnoses

Trouble diagnoses NAEL0427

SYMPTOM CHART NAEL0427S01

Reference
Symptom Diagnoses/service procedure
page

Any function of the system

Check power supply and ground circuit for display & NAVI control unit. EL-441
does not operate.

Strange screen color or 1. Check “DISPLAY SETTING”. EL-432

unusual screen brightness. 2. Check display in “Diagnosis of Display” MODE. —

The display is not dimmed 1. Check “DISPLAY SETTING”. EL-432

when turning lighting switch 2. Check lighting switch signal input to display & NAVI control unit correctly in
to ON. EL-424
“DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL FROM THE CAR” MODE.

No navigation guide voice 1. Check “Voice Guidance Setting”. —

are heard from both front
speakers. 2. Check voice guide operation. EL-442

Beep does not sound when

Check “BEEP ON/OFF SETTING”. EL-432
the system guides route.

Position marker does not

trace along the route being Go to “WORK FLOW FOR NAVIGATION INSPECTION”. EL-439
traveled.

Position marker does not

Check reverse signal input to display & NAVI control unit correctly by “DIAGNOS-
indicate forward or backward EL-424
TIC SIGNAL FROM THE CAR” MODE.
movement.

1. Is there anything obstructing the GPS antenna on the rear parcel finisher?
Radio wave of GPS cannot —
(GPS antenna located under the rear parcel finisher.)
be received. (GPS marker
on the display does not 2. Check GPS radio wave receive condition in “GPS INFORMATION SETTING”. EL-430
become green color.)
3. Check GPS antenna in “Self Diagnosis”. EL-417

Heading direction of position 1. Perform “ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” SETTING. EL-431

marker does not match
vehicle direction. 2. Go to “WORK FLOW FOR NAVIGATION INSPECTION”. EL-439

Stored location in the

address book and other Stored location in the address book and other memory functions may be lost if the
memory functions are lost battery is disconnected or becomes discharged. If this should occur, charge or —
when battery is disconnected replace the battery as necessary and re-enter the information.
or becomes discharged.

Map appears grey and can- The current location in the memory is out of the map data area.
EL-454
not be scrolled. Perform “Initialize Location”.

EL-438
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Trouble diagnoses (Cont’d)
WORK FLOW FOR NAVIGATION INSPECTION NAEL0427S02
GI

BR
SEL629XA
ST
*1: EL-444 *4: EL-424 *6: EL-419
*2: EL-417 *5: EL-440 *7: EL-422
*3: EL-420 RS

IDX

EL-439
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Trouble diagnoses (Cont’d)
DRIVING TEST =NAEL0427S03
During the driving test, diagnose the system by checking the dif-
ference of symptoms with each sensor ON or OFF.
Test pattern 1
Test method in which current position adjustment is not made
according to GPS data.
I Remove the GPS antenna connector from the display & NAVI
control unit. Drive the vehicle.
Before driving the vehicle, perform “ADJUST CURRENT
LOCATION” (EL-431).
Test pattern 2
Test procedure in which map matching is not used.
I Before driving the vehicle, perform “ADJUST CURRENT
LOCATION” (EL-431). With the ignition switch OFF and the
map CD-ROM removed from the display & NAVI control unit,
drive the vehicle. After driving the vehicle, reinstall the map
CD-ROM. Compare the saved driving tracks for the vehicle’s
current location with roads on the map.
Example
<The position marker consistently indicates the wrong position
when driving in the same area. Determine if this is the result of the
map matching function or the GPS function.>
, Perform test pattern 1.
<To verify the accuracy of the road configuration shown on the
display>
, Perform test patterns 1 and 2.
I Compare the map and the saved driving tracks. The precision
of the saved driving tracks is within several hundred meters.
<To make distance calibration and adjustments>
, Perform test patterns 1 and 2.
I Make adjustments by driving the vehicle over a known course
(highway or other road where distances are clearly marked).
Calibrate the distance against the known distance. Use the
formula below.
Calibration value = Screen display distance/Actual distance

EL-440
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Trouble diagnoses (Cont’d)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK FOR GI
DISPLAY & NAVI CONTROL UNIT =NAEL0427S04
Power Supply Circuit Check NAEL0427S0401
MA
Terminal Ignition switch

(+) (−) OFF ACC ON

EM
1 Ground Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage

2 Ground Battery voltage Battery voltage Battery voltage LC

5 Ground 0V 0V Battery voltage
SEL693VD
6 Ground 0V Battery voltage Battery voltage EC
If NG, check the following.
I 7.5A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)] FE
I 10A fuse [No. 10, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
I 15A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
CL
I Harness for open or short between fuse and display & NAVI
control unit
MT

AT
Ground Circuit Check NAEL0427S0402

Terminals Continuity TF
3 - Ground Yes

4 - Ground Yes PD

SEL694VD SU

IDX

EL-441
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Trouble diagnoses (Cont’d)
VOICE GUIDE OPERATION CHECK =NAEL0427S05

1 PRELIMINARY CHECK
1. Turn ignition switch to ACC position.
2. Insert the music CD into the radio and CD player.
3. Try to play the music CD.
Is the sound emitted from all speakers?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Repair or replace audio system.
Refer to “AUDIO”, EL-170.

2 CHECK NAVI OPERATION ON SIGNAL

1. Disconnect audio unit connector.
2. Push “VOICE” button.
3. Check voltage between terminal 28 and ground.

SEL645XA

3 CHECK VOICE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Push “VOICE” button.
2. Check voltage between NAVI control unit terminal 30 or 31 and ground.

SEL648X

EL-442
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Trouble diagnoses (Cont’d)

4 CHECK VOICE SIGNAL CIRCUIT GI

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and AUDIO unit connector. MA
3. Check continuity between NAVI control unit terminal 30 and AUDIO unit terminal 36.
4. Check continuity between NAVI control unit terminal 31 and AUDIO unit terminal 34.
EM

FE
SEL649X

Yes or No CL
Yes © Repair or replace audio system.
Refer to “AUDIO”, EL-170.
MT
No © Repair or replace harness or connector.

IDX

EL-443
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition is Not Abnormal

This Condition is Not Abnormal =NAEL0428

EXAMPLE OF BASIC OPERATIONAL ERRORS NAEL0428S01

Symptom Possible cause Repair order

No image is dis-
Monitor brightness control is set to full dark. Readjust monitor brightness.
played.

Map does not appear Map CD is not inserted or inserted upside down. Insert the map CD with the label facing up.
on display. Map mode is turned OFF. Press the “MAP” button.

No guide tone is
heard. Voice guide adjustment OFF/Volume is set to the
Adjust the voice guide level.
Voice guide volume lowest or highest level.
is too high or too low.

Dark display/Slow Wait until vehicle interior temperature rises to appro-

Low vehicle interior temperature
image movement priate level.

Small black or white

dots appear on the Unique liquid crystal display phenomena No problem
screen.

“Unable to read CD” Check map CD surface. If dirty, wipe clean with a
message appears Map CD surface is tainted/CD surface is partially soft cloth.
only during specified scratched.
operation. If map CD surface is damaged, replace the CD.

Area place names are not displayed.

If area place names do not appear on the map display, these names may not be available. Use the BIRD-
VIEWT flat surface map display function. Display output may differ. Note the items related to BIRDVIEWT
below.
I Priority is given to the display of place names in the direction of vehicle travel.
I Extended display of vehicle travel distance for both surfaces and steering angle (flat directional changes).
This phenomenon disappears after the display image has been replaced by another one.
I The names of route and area might vary between the immediate front area and distance front area.
I Alphanumeric display characters are limited to maintain display simplicity and clarity. Display details may
differ with time and place.
I Identical place and road names may appear on the display at more than one location.

EL-444
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition is Not Abnormal (Cont’d)
EXAMPLE OF CURRENT VEHICLE POSITION MARKER ERROR =NAEL0428S02
GI
The navigation system reads the vehicle distance and steering angle data. Because the vehicle is moving,
there will be an error in the current position indication. After the error appears, drive the vehicle for a short
distance. Stop the vehicle. If the position marker does not return to its original position, perform “ADJUST MA
CURRENT LOCATION” (EL-431).

AX
SEL698V

IDX

EL-445
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition is Not Abnormal (Cont’d)

Possible cause Drive condition Service procedure

On wet, icy, or gravel road where

frequent wheel slippage occurs, dis-
tance calculations may be errone-
Slippery road surface
ous. The position marker may show
the vehicle to be in inaccurate posi-
tion.
Area Hilly areas where the road has
banked curves. When the vehicle
enters these banked curves, there
Slanted area may be an error in steering angle
measurement. The position marker
may show the vehicle to be in inac-
curate position.

When the vehicle is driven on a

If the position marker does not
newly constructed road that does
Map display for a given road does not appear. move to the correct position
not appear on the existing map.
even after the vehicle has been
Map marking and calibration are not
driven approximately 10 km (6
possible. The position marker may
miles), perform “ADJUST CUR-
indicate inaccurate position in close
RENT LOCATION” (EL-431). If
proximity to the actual position.
necessary, perform “SPEED
Subsequently, when the vehicle is
CALIBRATION” (EL-429).
driven on a road which is available
SEL699V
as map data, the position marker
may still indicate an inaccurate posi-
Map tion.
data
The vehicle is driven on a road whose course
has been altered (usually to improve the road or When the map data shown on the
to eliminate some hazard). display and the actual conditions are
different. Map matching will not be
possible. The position marker may
indicate inaccurate position in close
proximity to the actual position. If
the vehicle is driven on the indicated
road, further errors may occur.
SEL700V

If the position marker does not

move to the correct position
even after the vehicle has been
Tire chains will affect distance sens- driven approximately 10 km (6
Vehicle Use of tire chains (Stormy weather) ing. The position marker may indi- miles), perform “SPEED CALI-
cate inaccurate position. BRATION” (EL-429). After
removing the tire chains, sens-
ing accuracy may recover by
itself.

EL-446
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition is Not Abnormal (Cont’d)

Possible cause Drive condition Service procedure GI

The gyro (angular velocity sensor)
needs about 15 seconds after the MA
engine is started to precisely sense
the angular velocity. Directional Wait a few moments between
Driving immediately after starting engine. sensing errors will occur if the starting the engine and actually
vehicle is moved immediately after driving the vehicle.
EM
starting the engine. The position
marker may indicate inaccurate
position. LC
Opera- When the vehicle is driven continu-
tion ously without stopping over a long Stop the vehicle. Perform EC
Continuous driving for long distances (non-stop) distance, errors in directional sens- “SPEED CALIBRATION” (EL-
ing may occur. The position marker 429).
may indicate inaccurate position. FE
If the position marker does not
Wheel spinning (peeling out) or simi-
move to the correct position
lar rough driving techniques can
Rough or violent driving adversely affect sensing accuracy.
even after the vehicle has been CL
driven approximately 10 km (6
The position marker may indicate
miles), perform “ADJUST CUR-
inaccurate position.
RENT LOCATION” (EL-431). MT
Positional calibration precision
Perform “ADJUST CURRENT
If current vehicle location is roughly
LOCATION” (EL-431) within a AT
set, the system may be unable to
precision standard of 1 mm
locate the road that the vehicle is
(0.04 in) on the display.
traveling on. (This is especially true
in an area where there are many
Note: During calibration, use TF
the most detailed map pos-
Posi- roads.)
sible.
tional
calibra-
SEL701V
PD
tion pro- Position calibration direction
cedures
When calibrating the position, check AX
the vehicle direction. If the vehicle
Perform “ADJUST CURRENT
direction is not correct, subsequent
LOCATION”, refer to EL-431.
precision of current location will be SU
affected.

SEL702V
BR

IDX

EL-447
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition is Not Abnormal (Cont’d)

Possible cause:
Drive condition Service procedure
—: Vehicle running ---: Indication

Y-intersection

In Y-intersections with a very

gradual change in course, a direc-
tional sensing may be inaccurate.
This may result in the position
marker giving the wrong road indica-
tion.

SEL703V

Spiral road

On loop bridges and similar struc-

tures which result in a large and
continuous turn, turning angle may
be sensed inaccurately. As a result,
the position marker may separate
from the route on the map.

SEL704V

Straight road
In long distance driving on a straight
road or road with very gradual
curves, map marking inaccuracies
may occur. In such cases, the posi-
tion marker may stray from the route
being traveled during subsequent If the position marker does not
turns due to inaccurate distance cal- move to the correct position
culation. even after the vehicle has been
SEL705V
Road driven approximately 10 km (6
shapes Winding road miles), perform “Store place”. If
required, also perform
Directional sensing precision errors “ADJUST CURRENT LOCA-
may occur when traveling on wind- TION” (EL-431).
ing roads. During map matching, the
position marker may stray to an
adjacent road having a similar
shape. Subsequent position marker
error may occur.
SEL706V

Grid-like road shape Directional sensing and distance

sensing, precision errors may occur
because of many roads having a
similar shape in the immediate area.
During map matching, the position
marker may stray to an adjacent
road having a similar shape. Subse-
quent position marker error may
SEL707V occur.

Parallel roads

When driving on a parallel road,

map matching errors may occur.
Subsequent position marker error
may also occur.

SEL708V

EL-448
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition is Not Abnormal (Cont’d)

Possible cause: GI
Drive condition Service procedure
—: Vehicle running ---: Indication

When the vehicle is driven in a park- MA

ing lot or similar area, such as in an
Parking lot or similar area area not normally marked as a road
on map, during map matching, the
system may select nearby roads.
EM
This error may continue after the
vehicle exits the parking area and
begins to run on ordinary roads. LC
Vehicle operation in a parking area
may involve frequent turns and up
and/or down operation. Directional EC
SEL709V sensing errors may occur leading to
Loca-
tion subsequent route and position mis-
takes. FE
Turntable When the ignition switch is OFF (the
usual situation when the vehicle is CL
on a turntable), the navigation sys-
tem receives no data from the gyro
(angular velocity sensor). When the
turntable rotates, no directional
MT
change is sensed. During subse-
quent vehicle operation, directional
SEL710V and route errors may occur.
AT

Position marker displays a completely different location

In circumstances such as those described below, GPS signal reception conditions may result in an erroneous
TF
position of the position marker. Perform “ADJUST CURRENT LOCATION” (EL-431).
NOTE: PD
I When GPS satellite signal reception conditions are poor, the position of position marker may be errone-
ous. If correction is not made immediately, the position marker error will be compounded and a completely
different location will be indicated. In an area where GPS satellite signal reception conditions are good, AX
the system can be returned to normal operation.
I The vehicle is driven aboard a car ferry or is towed for some distance with the ignition switch OFF. Vehicle
movement is not sensed. Current location calculations do not occur and current location data does not SU
appear on the display screen. Use GPS to accurately determine actual vehicle position. The system can
be returned to normal operation when the GPS satellite signal reception conditions are good.
Position marker jumps BR
In circumstances such as those described below, the position marker may jump as a result of automatic cur-
rent location corrections made by the system.
During map matching
ST
I During map matching, the position marker may jump from one spot to another. In this case, it may be cor-
rected to a wrong road or to an area where no road exist. RS
GPS location correcting
I Vehicle current location is sensed using the GPS data. Positional calibration is performed. The position
marker continues to be in the wrong position. It may jump about from one area of the screen to another. BT
In this case, it may be corrected to a wrong road or to an area where no road exist.
Position marker indicates that the vehicle is in the middle of an ocean or large river HA
The navigation system does not distinguish between land and water surfaces. In some cases, a position
marker error may cause the display to show the vehicle above a water surface.
Position of position marker varies when the vehicle is repeatedly operated on the same road SC
Driving lane and steering wheel movement results in a variety of different positions of the position mark when
traveling on the same road based on sensing results by the GPS antenna and gyro (angular velocity sensor).
Slow locational correction using map matching
I The map matching function requires verification of local data. To make the map matching function, some
distance needs to be driven.
I The map matching function may not provide accurate performance in an area where there are numerous IDX
parallel roads. Until the system judges the road characteristics, an incorrect position may be shown.
EL-449
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition is Not Abnormal (Cont’d)
GPS signal reception conditions are good. However, the position mark does not return to its proper
position.
I he system senses the vehicle location with an error of approximately 100 m (328 ft). Due to the limitation
of precision, the position marker may be inaccurate even if the GPS signal reception condition is good.
I The navigation system uses GPS data to determine vehicle location. GPS data is compared with other
locational sensing data during the map matching process. The system decides which data is more pre-
cise and uses that data.
I When the vehicle is stationary, GPS data cannot be used to make system corrections.
Area designations on the map display and the BIRDVIEWT display differ.
To prevent the display from becoming congested, alphanumeric information is abridged.
[No problem]
Correct position of your vehicle is not displayed.
Vehicle position changed after ignition key was turned to the OFF position (Vehicle is transported on car ferry,
car train, or by some other means).
[Operate vehicle for short time under GPS receiving conditions.]
The display does not change to night-time mode even though the light switch has been turned ON.
Lights have been turned on. In “DISPLAY CHANGE” mode, night-time mode on display has been switched to
day-time mode and still is.
[Turn lights on again. Set the display to night-time mode. Refer to EL-432.]
Map does not scroll even though the position of your vehicle is changed.
Present area does not appear on the display.
[Press the “MAP” switch.]
Vehicle position marker does not appear.
Present area does not appear on the display.
[Press the “MAP” switch.]
The map surface precision display (GPS satellite marker) still remains gray.
Vehicle is parked inside a building or in the shadow of a large building. This intercepts the GPS signal.
[Move the vehicle to a more open position.]
GPS signal is not received because objects are placed on the rear parcel shelf.
[Remove objects from the rear parcel shelf.]
GPS satellite position is bad.
[Wait until GPS satellite position improves.]
Vehicle position precision is bad.
The map surface precision display (GPS satellite marker) still remains gray.
[Refer to “The map surface precision display (GPS satellite marker) still remains gray” item (Symptoms)]
Vehicle speed and elapsed distance is calculated from the vehicle speed pulse. This pulse is dependent upon
tire size. If tire chains are used on the vehicle, accuracy will be affected (pulse rate will be too fast or too slow).
The same is true if the system installed to your vehicle is removed and installed on another vehicle.
[Drive the vehicle at a speed higher than 30 km/h (19 MPH) for approximately 30 minutes. Automatic read-
justment should occur. If it does not (remains too fast or too slow), distance calibration is required. Or, drive
the vehicle for a short distance. Perform “SPEED CALIBRATION” (EL-429). After removing the tire chains,
sensing accuracy may recover by itself.]
Bad map data or system defect (same error consistently occurs in the same area)
ROUTE SEARCH/ROUTE GUIDE NAEL0428S03
I If the present location or the destination location is displayed in the avoid area, it is not possible to search
routes.
I If the avoid area is set to wide range area, it may not be possible to find appropriate routes or search for
alternate routes.
I The automatic re-route calculates a return to the original route. Because of this, it may not be possible to
search appropriate new routes. If you deviate from the original route and wish to select an appropriate new
route, touch “Route Calculation”.
I The automatic re-route function may sometimes require considerable time.
I Displayed route number and directional information at a highway junction may differ from the information
posted on the actual road signs.
I Displayed street name information at a highway exit may differ from the information posted on the actual
road signs.
I Street name information displayed on the enlarged intersection map may differ from the information posted
on the actual road signs.

EL-450
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition is Not Abnormal (Cont’d)
I The enlarged intersection map may display an “Unknown Street” message at some street intersections. GI
I Because of road configuration, etc. the guide may finish early. If this occurs, follow the marker to reach
your destination.
I Destination area side information (left side and right side) may differ from actual conditions because of MA
data error.
Unable to Set Destination, Way Point, and/or Menu Items NAEL0428S0301
EM
Symptom Possible cause Repair order

Unable to search way points in A way point already crossed or determined to If you desire to pass through a way point for a LC
re-search mode have been crossed. second time, reperform route edit.

Route search does not occur.

Set designation areas and perform route EC
search.

Car marker does not appear on recom-

Turn list is not displayed. Drive on the recommended route. FE
mended route.

Turn the route guide ON. (Push “VOICE”

Route guide is canceled.
switch.) CL
Drive the vehicle on the search object route
Automatic search does not func- Vehicle is not running on search object route
or perform a manual route search. Note that
tion. (road indicated by orange, brown or red line). MT
all routes will be re-searched at this time.

Use the “RE-ROUTE” mode to search again

Unable to select detour route. Vehicle is not running on recommended route.
or return to the recommended route. AT
Detour route search results are All possible conditions were considered, but
This is not abnormal.
identical to previous search. results are the same.
TF
More than five way points cannot be specified
More than five way points have been previ-
Unable to set a way point. at the same time. Break down into smaller
ously set (and not cleared).
segments and perform search.
PD
Unable to select starting point Starting point will normally be your present
This is not abnormal.
during route edit. location during route edit.
AX
Park the vehicle in a safe area and perform
Cannot select certain menu items. While vehicle is running.
operation.
SU
Voice Guide Information NAEL0428S0302

Symptom Possible cause Repair order

BR
Voice guide does not function. Voice guide is only available at certain inter-
sections (marked with ). In some cases, the
This is not abnormal.
guide is not available even when the vehicle ST
makes a turn.

Return to recommended route or reperform

Vehicle is not running on recommended route.
route search.
RS
Voice guide is OFF. Set voice guide to the ON position.

Turn the route guide ON. (Push “VOICE”

BT
Route guide is canceled.
switch.)

The guide content does not corre- The content of the voice guide may vary Operate vehicle following the traffic rules and HA
spond to actual conditions. depending on the type of junction. regulation.

Route Search Information NAEL0428S0303

SC
Symptom Possible cause Repair order

Proceeding in desired direction.

Unable to find appropriate route in the desired
However, route search in desired This is not abnormal.
direction.
direction does not function.
IDX

EL-451
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This Condition is Not Abnormal (Cont’d)

Symptom Possible cause Repair order

Adjust position to wide road (brown) near des-

tination area. In an area where traffic direction
No object route is searched near destination
is displayed separately, pay close attention to
area.
No route is displayed. the direction of travel. Set the destination area
and the way point over the road.

Starting point and destination areas are very Move destination areas away from starting
near. point on the screen.

The recommended route is divided into indi-

Recommended route which has
vidual control segments. When way point 1 is
been passed disappears from the This is not abnormal.
passed, the data from the starting point to the
display.
way point 1 is erased.

There may be special conditions for roads

Search recommends roundabout near the starting point and destination area Slightly change starting point and destination
route. (one-way traffic, etc.). A roundabout route may area settings.
be displayed.

Landmark display does not show Mistaken or missing map data may result in
Change map CD.
actual conditions. erroneous display.

Course search data may not exist for closely Set the destination area to the general route
Recommended route drawn positioned starting point, way points, and des- (indicated by a thick brown line). However,
slightly away from starting point, tination area shown on the map. Route guide even if the selected route is a major one,
way points, and destination area. starting point, way point, and destination point appropriate route search data may not be
may be separated. available.

LOCATION OF CAR MARKER NAEL0428S04

I If the vehicle has been parked in a multi-level parking facility or underground parking facility, the car marker
position may be inaccurate immediately after exiting the parking facility.
I The GPS accuracy is within ±100 m (300 ft). Even when receiving conditions are excellent, further posi-
tional correction may not occur.
STREET INDICATION NAEL0428S05
I Street names displayed on the map may differ from the actual street names.
I An “Unknown Street” message may appear on the map in place of street name information.
RESEARCH NAEL0428S06
I Position may be searched by house number. However, the displayed position and street may differ from
the actual position and street.
I When position is searched using POI, the displayed position may differ from the actual position.
I Some data may not be available for new buildings and other structures in a map.
GPS ANTENNA NAEL0428S07
I Do not place metal objects above the GPS antenna mounted on the rear parcel shelf. This will cause
interference with signal reception.
I Do not place mobile telephones or vehicle radio transceivers in close proximity to the GPS antenna
mounted on the rear parcel shelf. This may cause interference with signal reception.

EL-452
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Program Loading

Program Loading NAEL0429

Power supply ON MA
Insert CD-ROM
with designated program. EM

Push for changing version. CL

No
AT

PD
Yes
AX

SU
* Program loading progress is shown on the bar graph
at the center of the screen. BR

Map CD-ROM insertion

HA
Position marker screen display

Note: Load the program only after the engine has been started. SEL612X
IDX

EL-453
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Initialization

Initialization NAEL0430
This procedure is for initializing the current location. Perform “Ini-
tialize Location” when the vehicle is transported a long distance by
trailer, etc.
Map with grey background appears and the vehicle location can-
not be adjusted by scrolling the display when the vehicle location
in the memory is out of the area of the inserted map data.
Perform “Initialize Location” when this occurs.
NOTE:
I Only initialize the system when the display & NAVI control
unit is replaced. If the system is initialized in other cases,
it may cause inaccurate positioning of the position marker
for a while.
I Initialize the system outside for receiving the radio wave
from the GPS satellite.

HOW TO PERFORM NAEL0430S01

1. Switch the navigation system mode to self-diagnosis by push-
ing both “MAP” and “D/N” switches at the same time for more
than 5 seconds.

SEL583X

2. Touch “Confirmation/ adjustment”.

SEL584X

3. Touch “Initialize Location”. Then the previous screen is dis-

played.

SEL588X

EL-454
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Initialization (Cont’d)
4. Push “Previous” switch. GI

LC
SEL584X

5. Push the “MAP” switch. EC

6. Touch “Setting”.
FE

MT
SEL598X
AT
7. Touch “System Setting”.

SEL599X SU
8. Touch “GPS Information”.
BR

SEL600X BT
9. More than one GPS satellite icon turns green. (It may take 1
to 15 minutes.) HA
NOTE:
Drive the vehicle for a while* in order to change the receiving
condition of the radio wave from the GPS satellite if the GPS SC
icon does not turn green.
* The driving distance which is necessary depends on the
receiving condition of the radio wave from the GPS satellite.

IDX
SEL146W

EL-455
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Initialization (Cont’d)
10. Push “MAP” switch and check the following.
I Confirm that the GPS icon on the map turns green.
I Then the position marker should show the current location.
I Position marker rotates corresponding to the movement of the
vehicle.
11. Initialization is completed.

SEL613X

EL-456
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Engine Compartment

Engine Compartment NAEL0431

MEL912N
IDX

EL-457
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Passenger Compartment

Passenger Compartment NAEL0432

MEL918O

EL-458
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION
Passenger Compartment (Cont’d)

MEL417O

IDX

EL-459
HARNESS LAYOUT
How to Read Harness Layout

How to Read Harness Layout NAEL0433

SEL252V

The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
I Main Harness
I Engine Room Harness (Engine Compartment)
I Engine Control Harness
TO USE THE GRID REFERENCE NAEL0433S01
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list.
2. Find the grid reference.
3. On the drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row.
4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone.
5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
CONNECTOR SYMBOL NAEL0433S02
Main symbols of connector (in Harness Layout) are indicated in the below.
Water proof type Standard type
Connector type
Male Female Male Female

I Cavity: Less than 4

I Relay connector

I Cavity: From 5 to 8

I Cavity: More than 9

— —

I Ground terminal etc.

—

EL-460
HARNESS LAYOUT
Outline

Outline NAEL0434
GI

AX
MEL072M

IDX

EL-461
HARNESS LAYOUT
Main Harness

Main Harness NAEL0435

MEL418O

EL-462
HARNESS LAYOUT
Main Harness (Cont’d)

MEL419O

IDX

EL-463
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Room Harness

Engine Room Harness NAEL0436

MEL917N

EL-464
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Room Harness (Cont’d)

MEL481O

IDX

EL-465
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness

Engine Control Harness NAEL0437

MEL317N

EL-466
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine Control Harness (Cont’d)

MEL705O

IDX

EL-467
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness LH

Body Harness LH NAEL0438

MEL420O

EL-468
HARNESS LAYOUT
Body Harness RH

Body Harness RH NAEL0439

MEL445P
IDX

EL-469
HARNESS LAYOUT
Back Door Harness

Back Door Harness NAEL0440

MEL241M

EL-470
HARNESS LAYOUT
Engine and Transmission Harness

Engine and Transmission Harness NAEL0441

MEL479O
IDX

EL-471
HARNESS LAYOUT
Room Lamp Harness

Room Lamp Harness NAEL0442

MEL446P

EL-472
HARNESS LAYOUT
Air Bag Harness

Air Bag Harness NAEL0443

AX
MEL244M

IDX

EL-473
HARNESS LAYOUT
Front Door Harness

Front Door Harness NAEL0444

MEL482O

EL-474
HARNESS LAYOUT
Rear Door Harness

Rear Door Harness NAEL0445

MEL261M
IDX

EL-475
NAEL0446

BULB SPECIFICATIONS
Headlamp

Headlamp NAEL0446S01

Item Wattage W

High/Low (Semi-sealed beam) 60/55 (HB2)

Exterior Lamp NAEL0446S02

Item Wattage W

Front fog lamp 55

Front turn signal lamp 21

Parking lamp 5

Turn signal lamp 27

Rear combination lamp Stop/Tail lamp 21/5

Back-up lamp 18

License plate lamp 5

High-mounted stop lamp 5

Interior Lamp NAEL0446S03

Item Wattage W

Interior lamp 10

Spot lamp 8

Luggage room lamp 10

EL-476
NAEL0447

WIRING DIAGRAM CODES (CELL CODES)

Use the chart below to find out what each wiring GI

Code Section Wiring Diagram Name
diagram code stands for.
Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical FTS AT A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor
index to find the location (page number) of each MA
wiring diagram. FUELLH EC Fuel Injection System Function
(Left Bank)
Code Section Wiring Diagram Name
FUELRH EC Fuel Injection System Function EM
1STSIG AT A/T 1ST Signal (Right Bank)

2NDSIG AT A/T 2ND Signal H/LAMP EL Headlamp

LC
3RDSIG AT A/T 3RD Signal HORN EL Horn

HSEAT EL Heated Seat

4THSIG AT A/T 4TH Signal EC
A/C, A HA Auto Air Conditioner IATS EC Intake Air Temperature Sensor

AAC/V EC IACV-AAC Valve IGN/SG EC Ignition Signal FE

ABS BR Anti-lock Brake System ILL EL Illumination

AP/SEN EC Absolute Pressure Sensor INJECT EC Injector CL

ASCD EL Automatic Speed Control Device INT/L EL Interior, Spot, Vanity Mirror, and
Luggage Room Lamps
AT/C EC A/T Control MT
IVC-L EC Intake Valve Timing Control Sole-
ATDIAG EC A/T Diagnosis Communication noid Valve LH
Line AT
IVC-R EC Intake Valve Timing Control Sole-
AUDIO EL Audio noid Valve RH
AUT/DP EL Automatic Drive Positioner IVCS-L EC Intake Valve Timing Control Posi- TF
tion Sensor LH
BA/FTS AT A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor
and TCM Power Supply IVCS-R EC Intake Valve Timing Control Posi-
tion Sensor RH
PD
BACK/L EL Back-up Lamp
KS EC Knock Sensor
BYPS/V EC Vacuum Cut Valve Bypass Valve
AX
LAN AT A/T Communication Line
CHARGE SC Charging System
LOAD EC Electrical Load Signal
CHIME EL Warning Chime SU
LPSV AT Line Pressure Solenoid Valve
CIGAR EL Cigarette Lighter
MAFS EC Mass Air Flow Sensor
CLOCK EL Clock BR
MAIN AT Main Power Supply and Ground
COMPAS EL Compass and Thermometer
Circuit
D/LOCK EL Power Door Lock
MAIN EC Main Power Supply and Ground
ST
DEF EL Rear Window Defogger Circuit

DTRL EL Headlamp — With Daytime Light METER EL Speedometer, Tachometer, RS

System — Temp., Oil, and Fuel Gauges

ECTS EC Engine Coolant Temperature MIL/DL EC MIL and Data Link Connectors
Sensor
BT
MIRROR EL Door Mirror
ENGSS AT Engine Speed Signal
KEYLES EL Remote Keyless Entry System
HA
F/FOG EL Front Fog Lamp
NATS EL NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobi-
F/PUMP EC Fuel Pump Control lizer System)
SC
FICD EC IACV-FICD Solenoid Valve NAVI EL Navigation System

FLS1 EC Fuel Gauge NONDTC AT Non-detectable Items

FLS2 EC Fuel Gauge O2H1B1 EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater

(Bank 1)
FLS3 EC Fuel Gauge
IDX

EL-477
WIRING DIAGRAM CODES (CELL CODES)

Code Section Wiring Diagram Name Code Section Wiring Diagram Name

O2H1B2 EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater SWL/V EC Swirl Control Valve Control Sole-
(Bank 2) noid Valve

O2H2B1 EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater TAIL/L EL Parking, License and Tail Lamps
(Bank 1)
TCCSIG AT A/T TCC Signal (Lock up)
O2H2B2 EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater
(Bank 2) TCV AT Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid
Valve
O2S1B1 EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (Bank
1) T/F TF Transfer

O2S1B2 EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 (Bank FTTS EC Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor
2) TP/SW EC Throttle Position Switch
O2S2B1 EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Bank TPS AT Throttle Position Sensor
1)
TPS EC Throttle Position Sensor
O2S2B2 EC Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 (Bank
2) TRNSCV EL Homelink Universal Transceiver

OVRCSV AT Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve TRSA/T AT Turbine Revolution Sensor

P/ANT EL Power Antenna TURN EL Turn Signal and Hazard Warning

Lamps
PGC/V EC EVAP Canister Purge Volume
Control Solenoid Valve VEHSEC EL Vehicle Security System

PHASE EC Camshaft Position Sensor VIAS/V EC Variable Induction Air Control

(PHASE) System

PNP/SW EC Park/Neutral Position Switch VSS EC Vehicle Speed Sensor

PNP/SW AT Park/Neutral Position Switch VSSA/T AT Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revo-
lution Sensor)
POS EC Crankshaft Position Sensor
(CKPS) (POS) VSSMTR AT Vehicle Speed Sensor MTR

POWER EL Power Supply Routing WARN EL Warning Lamps

PRE/SE EC EVAP Control System Pressure WINDOW EL Power Window

Sensor
WIP/R EL Rear Wiper and Washer
PST/SW EC Power Steering Oil Pressure
Switch WIPER EL Front Wiper and Washer

REF EC Crankshaft Position Sensor

(CKPS) (REF)

REMOTE EL Audio (Remote Control Switch)

RP/SEN EC Refrigerant Pressure

S/SIG EC Start Signal

S/VCSW EC Swirl Control Valve Control

Vacuum Check Switch

SEAT EL Power Seat

SHIFT AT A/T Shift Lock System

SROOF EL Sunroof

SRS RS Supplemental Restraint System

SSV/A AT Shift Solenoid Valve A

SSV/B AT Shift Solenoid Valve B

START SC Starting System

STOP/L EL Stop lamp

EL-478

Electrical System: GI MA
No ratings yet
Electrical System: GI MA
510 pages
El - Electrical System
100% (1)
El - Electrical System
504 pages
Electrical System: Content
No ratings yet
Electrical System: Content
788 pages
2001 Nissan Sentra 50259
100% (1)
2001 Nissan Sentra 50259
346 pages
4g69 DTC
100% (2)
4g69 DTC
440 pages
Electrical System
No ratings yet
Electrical System
362 pages
VW Jetta 6 Rus 2010 Wiring Diagrams Eng
No ratings yet
VW Jetta 6 Rus 2010 Wiring Diagrams Eng
469 pages
01 - CC (GE NEMA Size)
No ratings yet
01 - CC (GE NEMA Size)
212 pages
Automatic Transmission: Section
100% (1)
Automatic Transmission: Section
611 pages
Nissan Frontier 2002 Wiring Diagram
100% (20)
Nissan Frontier 2002 Wiring Diagram
278 pages
Dokumen - Tips Gdi 35 6g74 Manual
No ratings yet
Dokumen - Tips Gdi 35 6g74 Manual
263 pages
EC - Engine Control 2002 Nissan Maxima
No ratings yet
EC - Engine Control 2002 Nissan Maxima
766 pages
16 Types of Computer Ports and Their Functions
No ratings yet
16 Types of Computer Ports and Their Functions
27 pages
SSP 992003 A6 Allroadquattro
100% (1)
SSP 992003 A6 Allroadquattro
56 pages
Body + Electrical
No ratings yet
Body + Electrical
259 pages
Suzuki DF4-6
No ratings yet
Suzuki DF4-6
108 pages
Sistema Eléctrico (Nissan Sunny 2001)
67% (3)
Sistema Eléctrico (Nissan Sunny 2001)
350 pages
CX-7 WD
100% (1)
CX-7 WD
246 pages
SISTEMA ELÉCTRICOS, Nissan Patrol GR, 2001, Gasolina
50% (2)
SISTEMA ELÉCTRICOS, Nissan Patrol GR, 2001, Gasolina
278 pages
Home Free Download Circuit Diagram Car Stereo Wiring Car Manuals Service Manual
No ratings yet
Home Free Download Circuit Diagram Car Stereo Wiring Car Manuals Service Manual
13 pages
AD100Pro Marine Manual
100% (1)
AD100Pro Marine Manual
89 pages
Xtrail
100% (4)
Xtrail
564 pages
EC System sr20
No ratings yet
EC System sr20
332 pages
Outdoor 2023 (For Marketting)
No ratings yet
Outdoor 2023 (For Marketting)
31 pages
Nissan VQ30 Wiring Diagram
100% (7)
Nissan VQ30 Wiring Diagram
560 pages
2018 - 99500M72R00-74E-Ertiga (Section 10K) - M-G-CM-62-1
100% (1)
2018 - 99500M72R00-74E-Ertiga (Section 10K) - M-G-CM-62-1
34 pages
Ec QG16
100% (2)
Ec QG16
320 pages
Nissan Primera Engine Control System
100% (3)
Nissan Primera Engine Control System
1,794 pages
HR15
100% (5)
HR15
416 pages
Wiring Diagram: Engine Control System
100% (3)
Wiring Diagram: Engine Control System
21 pages
Nissan X-Trail Faults and Recalls
No ratings yet
Nissan X-Trail Faults and Recalls
4 pages
Xtrail t32
100% (3)
Xtrail t32
113 pages
Toyota Camry Wiring
No ratings yet
Toyota Camry Wiring
167 pages
t370hw02 VC Auo
No ratings yet
t370hw02 VC Auo
27 pages
Nissan Note Power Control System
100% (3)
Nissan Note Power Control System
106 pages
CHARGING+SYSTEM 1hz, 1hd
100% (1)
CHARGING+SYSTEM 1hz, 1hd
19 pages
4g63 89-93 Fuel System PDF
No ratings yet
4g63 89-93 Fuel System PDF
40 pages
2 2az Fe+cooling
No ratings yet
2 2az Fe+cooling
36 pages
Casio Ev500c LCD TV SM
No ratings yet
Casio Ev500c LCD TV SM
32 pages
Body Control System: Section
100% (1)
Body Control System: Section
65 pages
2007 Forester ECM Pinout
No ratings yet
2007 Forester ECM Pinout
10 pages
Transfer D22
No ratings yet
Transfer D22
38 pages
2008 Nissan Teana J32 Service Manual-GI
100% (1)
2008 Nissan Teana J32 Service Manual-GI
50 pages
CR14DE Interface Diagram V02
100% (1)
CR14DE Interface Diagram V02
7 pages
Maintenance of Machine Tools: Dr.K.Elangovan
No ratings yet
Maintenance of Machine Tools: Dr.K.Elangovan
15 pages
DTC P0505 Idle Air Control System DTC P0511 Idle Air Control Circuit
No ratings yet
DTC P0505 Idle Air Control System DTC P0511 Idle Air Control Circuit
9 pages
Srs Airbag Control System: Section
No ratings yet
Srs Airbag Control System: Section
92 pages
Patrol Y61 2.8 TD Ecu System Operation Diagram
100% (1)
Patrol Y61 2.8 TD Ecu System Operation Diagram
9 pages
DTC P1119 Inlet Metering Valve (IMV) Control Malfunction
No ratings yet
DTC P1119 Inlet Metering Valve (IMV) Control Malfunction
5 pages
ISM20 InfraStake Quick Start Guide
No ratings yet
ISM20 InfraStake Quick Start Guide
7 pages
P1656 OCV Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1)
67% (3)
P1656 OCV Circuit Malfunction (Bank 1)
3 pages
DATOS ECU TF Nissan NAVARA
No ratings yet
DATOS ECU TF Nissan NAVARA
5 pages
Fuse Box Diagram Nissan Frontier (D40 2005-2014)
No ratings yet
Fuse Box Diagram Nissan Frontier (D40 2005-2014)
1 page
Engine Control For 1GR-FE: 78 Toyota Tacoma (Em01D0U)
No ratings yet
Engine Control For 1GR-FE: 78 Toyota Tacoma (Em01D0U)
12 pages
BH Curve PDF
No ratings yet
BH Curve PDF
7 pages
Ranger Drifter LHD Ewd PDF
100% (3)
Ranger Drifter LHD Ewd PDF
104 pages
Design and Simulation of Two Phase Interleaved Bidirectional DC To DC Converter
No ratings yet
Design and Simulation of Two Phase Interleaved Bidirectional DC To DC Converter
7 pages
Nissan Frontier 2002 Wiring Diagram
98% (65)
Nissan Frontier 2002 Wiring Diagram
20 pages
Nissan Throttle Body Relearn Procedure
No ratings yet
Nissan Throttle Body Relearn Procedure
2 pages
Busbar size calculation 1
No ratings yet
Busbar size calculation 1
1 page
Diode Clamper Circuit. by - Engr - Irshad Rahim Memon - PPT Video Online Download
100% (1)
Diode Clamper Circuit. by - Engr - Irshad Rahim Memon - PPT Video Online Download
9 pages
1994 Nissan Sentra SE 1994 Nissan Sentra SE
No ratings yet
1994 Nissan Sentra SE 1994 Nissan Sentra SE
2 pages
Code P1604 Toyota Startability Malfunction (With Video)
No ratings yet
Code P1604 Toyota Startability Malfunction (With Video)
1 page
Nissan Note E11 2005-2013 Fuel System
No ratings yet
Nissan Note E11 2005-2013 Fuel System
34 pages
Calculating Parasitic Capacitance of Three-Phase Common Mode Choke
No ratings yet
Calculating Parasitic Capacitance of Three-Phase Common Mode Choke
6 pages
C-16 Connecting Rod
No ratings yet
C-16 Connecting Rod
3 pages
D B G P A K L M F C E N: Drawing Third Angle Projection REV Millimeters
No ratings yet
D B G P A K L M F C E N: Drawing Third Angle Projection REV Millimeters
2 pages
3000 Chapter 6
No ratings yet
3000 Chapter 6
36 pages
Subaru 2004 Forester XT Transmission TCM IO Pinout
100% (3)
Subaru 2004 Forester XT Transmission TCM IO Pinout
3 pages
Animatronics: A Technical Seminar Report On
No ratings yet
Animatronics: A Technical Seminar Report On
26 pages
Engine Control (3SZ-VE
No ratings yet
Engine Control (3SZ-VE
1 page
Oil Change Service - Petrol A: Haynes
No ratings yet
Oil Change Service - Petrol A: Haynes
4 pages
Nissan Sentra Engine Tuning
100% (1)
Nissan Sentra Engine Tuning
18 pages
Bipolar Stepper Controller Using The Couple L297 - L6203 (Upto 5A)
No ratings yet
Bipolar Stepper Controller Using The Couple L297 - L6203 (Upto 5A)
4 pages
Cable Trade Sizes
No ratings yet
Cable Trade Sizes
2 pages
Shift Solenoid E Malfunction
No ratings yet
Shift Solenoid E Malfunction
2 pages
DTC P1128 Throttle Control Motor Lock Malfunction: Circuit Description
100% (1)
DTC P1128 Throttle Control Motor Lock Malfunction: Circuit Description
1 page
KS17.pl.en
No ratings yet
KS17.pl.en
1 page
BMW Codes Obd II
80% (5)
BMW Codes Obd II
45 pages
DDRC420FR: Robust Control of Switched Loads
No ratings yet
DDRC420FR: Robust Control of Switched Loads
4 pages
Grounding and Overvoltage Protection IP 16-4-1: Scope
No ratings yet
Grounding and Overvoltage Protection IP 16-4-1: Scope
11 pages
Reservoirs
No ratings yet
Reservoirs
2 pages
DTC 61 No. 2 Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction
100% (1)
DTC 61 No. 2 Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction
3 pages
Non Return Valve
No ratings yet
Non Return Valve
2 pages
DTC C1554/23 Power Supply Relay Failure DTC C1555/25 Motor Relay Welding Failure
100% (2)
DTC C1554/23 Power Supply Relay Failure DTC C1555/25 Motor Relay Welding Failure
3 pages
Toyota Trouble Codes
No ratings yet
Toyota Trouble Codes
3 pages
034 - Engine - VVT System Malfunction (Bank 1) PDF
No ratings yet
034 - Engine - VVT System Malfunction (Bank 1) PDF
6 pages
Mazda 323 Laser
80% (5)
Mazda 323 Laser
2 pages
RENR5092 Localizacion y Solucion de Problemas
No ratings yet
RENR5092 Localizacion y Solucion de Problemas
3 pages
Manual - Bomba Água ShurFlo II
No ratings yet
Manual - Bomba Água ShurFlo II
2 pages